新目标九年级英语课件

新目标九年级英语课件新目标九年级英语 05-10

新目标九年级英语课件。

如果你对“新目标九年级英语课件”感到好奇请阅读下面为你准备的资料。教案课件是每个老师工作中上课需要准备的东西，每天老师要有责任写好每份教案课件。编写完整的教案是完成授课任务的保障。热烈欢迎您莅临这里我们将不断提高网页质量为您带来更棒的体验！

新目标九年级英语课件(篇1)

广州市东圃中学张虹

1、单词

maybe也许 countryside乡村 camera照相机 film胶卷

drink饮料 bring带来 weatherman 天气预报员 cut割；切

degree度数 stop阻止 pack打包/行李 snowman雪人

2、短语

nothing much没什么 look forward to盼望 go climbing去爬山

It doesn’t matter.没关系 best wishes最真挚的祝愿

in the world全世界 That’s a pity!真糟糕/遗憾！

go sightseeing去游览 have a picnic去野餐

3、句子

1) Listen! Tomorrow’s weather report is on the radio.

听！收音机里正在播放天气预报。

2) I hope you won’t forget us. 我希望你不要忘记我们。

3) The snowmen will slowly becomes water when it gets warm.

当天气变暖时，雪人会慢慢变成水。

4) I will send you a postcard. 我会给你寄一张明信片。

5) I’m waiting for your answer. Please write to me soon.

我在等你的来信。请尽快给我写信。

6) Thanks for inviting me. I’d love to go with you.

谢谢你的邀请。我很乐意和你去。

新目标九年级英语课件(篇2)

新课程标准感知

知识要点本单元用虚拟句谈论一些假设的情况

本单元要点如下

1．学会谈论一些假设的、虚幻的情况；

2．达到如何使用虚拟句提出建议的目标；

3．学会表示与现在的情况相反的虚拟语气的结构；

4．学会用虚拟语气表述自己的还没有实现的愿望

一.重点词汇

million、pimple、energetic、confident、shirt、tie、medical、research lottery、million、

trouble、energetic、confident、in public、social

二.重点短语

1. won the lottery 赢得抽奖 2. in public 公共的、公众的

2. in the slightest 一点也；根本 4. plenty of 很多的、足够的

get along with 与…相处 6. let …down 使…失望、沮丧

7. come up with 提出、想出（问题） 8. medical research 医学研究

9. what if 如果…怎么办 10. be late for 迟到…

11. be nervous 紧张的 12. get nervous （变得）紧张的

13. take a long walk 散步 14. ask one’s permission 征求某人的许可

15. without permission 没得到许可 16. introduce oneself 自我介绍

17. rather than 而不是 18. a circle of good friends 朋友圈子

三.交际用语

1. If I were you , I’d wear a shirt and tie. 如果我是你，我就会穿衬衫打领带。

2. If I were you , I’d take an umbrella. 如果我是你，我就带把伞。

3. What would you do if you won a million dollars ? 如果你赚了一百万美元，你会做什么？

4. What if I don’t know anyone ? 如果我一个人也不认识怎么办？

5. You should eat lots of fruits and vegetable and drink lots of water.你应该吃大量水果、蔬菜，大量喝水。

6. What are you like ? I think I’m outgoing. 你的性格如何？我想我很外向。

四.语法聚焦

What would you do if you won a million dollars ？

I’d give it to medical research .

I can’t sleep the night before an exam .What should I do ？

If I were you , I’d take a long walk before going to bed .

第一课时

Section A

Step 1 Free Talk

Talk about good habits of the students. Say, “ Wd all have some good habits. Can you tell the other students what good habits you have.” For example, getting up early, reading, helping others, not wasting money, etc.

When they talk, write some on the blackboard. Get the students to think about if they don’t hav have these good habits what will happen.

Step2 Talking and writing

Say, “Please imagine, what would you do if you had a lot of money?” The students discuss with the partners. Then get them to write some other situations in the list and share the answers. Point out: The sentences here are imaginary situations. They may not come true, just imaginary. So we often use the past tense and “would ” to express this kind of situation.

Step 3 Listening and talking

1b. First talk about some information in the picture. Say, “ We are going to listen to a conversation about their ideas about how to spend a million dollars.”

Students listen to the tape and number the pictures.

Then help the students practice the similar dialogue simply in 1c.

Step 4 Listening

First ask “ What would you do if you went to a party? What would you wear? What would you bring? What would you feel if you don’t know anyone at the party?”

After talking about the questions, come up with the question in 2a “ Why is Larry nervous?” Then listen.

2b. Listen again. Check the four things Larry’s sister says to him. Then check the students’ answers.

Step 5 Pairwork

According to the listening Text above, get the students to practice the conversation by looking at the instruction in 2c.

Ask some pairs to act out their own dialogues.

第二课时

Step 1 Free talk

Say “Imagine, what would you do if you were very old?”

“What would you do if you were teachers?”

“ What would you do if you had a lot of money?”

Get the students to talk about the questions. Collect their answers and write some on the blackboard.

Step 2 Grammar Focus

Point out the sentences on the blackboard all belong to imaginary situations. Ask the students to find out the rules in the sentences. Then look at the sentences in Grammar Focus. Comprehend them. Talk about some information about imaginary situations.

Step 3 Reading and watching

Ask “ Do you have some trouble during your daily life?” The students talk about their trouble and ask the other students to give advice. Then 3a, ask the students match each problem with the correct advice. Check the answers. Then comprehend the sentences.

Step 4 Game

Ask the students to write their problems on a piece of paper. Ask one student to choose some paper with problems on and read the problems. After he / she reads one problem, the other students try to give advice by using “ You should…” or “ If I were you…”.

Exercises:

完成句子：

1. He doesn’t know ______________( 穿什么) at the party.

2. _____________ (如果我是你), I would buy a small present.

3. What would you do ______________ (如果你获得了第一名)？

4. You’d take a long walk ______________ (在吃过晚餐之后).

5. I ______________(变得紧张) before big exams.

第三课时

Section B

Step 1 Word competition

Say “ We usually use adjectives to describe a person. Do you know those words? Let’s have a competition.”

Get representatives of boys and girls to come to the front and write the words about description on the blackboard as many as they can.

Step 2 Giving definitions

Say “ Just now we had the word competition. Then let’s try to give definitions of these words in English.” Discuss with partners and give definitions.

Step 3 Writing and competition

Get the students to understand the instructions in 1a. Understand the meaning of every word. Then fill in the blanks with the words. Check the answers.

After students write the words, have a competition of making up sentences. Say, “ Please make up sentences by using these words. Let’s see who can make up more sentences , boys or girls?”. Then do it.

Step 4 Listening

2a. At first help the students understand the instruction. Look at the personality survey. Explain “ give a speech, without permission, introduce oneself to sb.” Then listen. Check the questions Celia asks.

Some points:

1. give a speech = make a speech, give a talk 演讲

2. without permission （未经允许） with permission （经过允许）

permission n. “允许” permit v. “允许”

permit sb to do sth 相当于allow sb to do sth 意思是“允许某人做某事”

例：The teacher didn’t permit us to swim in this river.

= We can’t swim in this river without the teacher’s permission.

3. introduce oneself to sb. 意思是“向某人自我介绍”

例：Let me introduce myself to you. I am Jim.

2b. Listen again. Circle Bill’s responses. Then check the answers.

Step 5 Practice

Get the students to practice the similar conversation in 2c by looking at the personality survey.

Exercises:

翻译句子：

1．他害怕在公众场合讲话。

2．这个女孩很善交际。她有许多朋友。

3．莫扎特是个很有创造力的音乐家。

4．男孩们总是精力旺盛。他们几乎从不感觉到累。

第四课时

Step 1 Free talk

Ask questions like “What would you do if the teacher asked you to give a speech in front of the whole school? What would you do if someone took away your things without permission? What would you do if someone asked you to be in a movie? What would you do if you wanted to be friends with a new student?”

Get the students to talk about them.

Step 2 Reading

Ask the students to read the passage in 3a and fill in the blanks in the results with “a”, “b” or “c” according to the survey in 2a. Then help the students comprehend the whole passage.

Some points:

1. pretty ① 相当，非常相当于very, quite

② 漂亮相当于beautiful

2. in the slightest 意思是“根本，一点也”

not….in the slightest 意思是“根本不，一点也不”，相当于not…. at all.

slight 是adj. 表示“轻微的，不重要的”

例：I have a slight cold. 我有点轻微的感冒。

3. company ① 陪伴（不可数n.）

② 公司（可数n.）

例：I feel at home in your company. 和你在一起令我轻松自在。

He is a driver in a bus company. 他是一家汽车公司的司机。

4. rather than, would rather…than 意思是“与其……倒不如”，“宁愿…...而不愿”

例：I want to stay at home rather than go to school.

I would rather stay at home than go to school.

这两个短语前后都连接两个相同的成分。

After explaining the points, ask the students to read the passage.

Step 3 Groupwork

Divide the students into several groups with four students in each. Design a personality survey according to the example in 3b. The survey must include at least two questions. Then discuss about the questions with the group members.

At last share the students’ answers and make a conclusion, such as “Student….. is very outgoing. Student … is very friendly” and so on.

Homework:

Recite the passage in 3a.

第五课时

Step 1 Warming up

Ask the students make examples about good or bad personality. Discuss about the personality the students like.

Step 2 Self check

For Ex 1, fill in each bland with the correct word given. Understand the Chinese meaning of every sentence.

For Ex 2, read the e-mail and comprehend it.

Then read the passage. Write a reply according to this email. Ask some students to read their replies.

Step3 Just for fun

Students read the funny cartoons at last.

第六课时

Step 1 Warming up

Talk about the questions “ Do you often surf the Internet? Do you have a net friend? What would you do if the net friend wanted to meet you?”

Step 2 Reading

Say “ In our daily life, we would meet lots of situations. And what would you do if something happened? Then let’s study the passage.”

Give a reading task to the task to the students. “ Find out all the accidents and problems in the reading text.” After the students finish the task, help them comprehend the passage.

Some points:

1. If I were you, I’d have a first-aid…..

此句使用了虚拟语气，对现在的事情进行假设，表示与现在事实相反的一种假设。此时，主句中谓语动词使用“should / would + v原形”的结构。If从句中谓语动词使用一般过去时态，如果该动词是be动词，则一律用were.

例：If I knew this, I would tell you.

2. burn-burned – burned 或burn – burnt – burnt 意思是“烧伤，烧坏”

例：The house is burning.

如果表示“被烧死”，则常用be killed by fire / in the fire, 也可用be burnt to death.

3. injure “伤害，损伤”，指事故中肉体上受到伤害，也指精神上的损伤，常用人作主语。

例：She was badly injured in an accident.

4. hurt “疼痛”，可用疼痛的具体部位作主语，也可用人作主语。

例：My head hurts.

She hurt herself yesterday.

Read the passage, and finish 3b.

新目标九年级英语课件(篇3)

广州市东圃中学张虹

1、单词

London伦敦 Germany德国 Spain西班牙 term学期

Walu华露 India 印度 New Zealand 新西兰

Moscow莫斯科 Toronto 多伦多 Madrid马德里 building大楼

New York纽约 Singapore新加坡 Berlin柏林 Italy 意大利

class teacher班主任 Auckland 奥克兰 Paris巴黎 Tokyo东京

2、短语

on weekdays周一至周五 at the age of ten 在十岁时

answer the questions回答问题 far from远离

3. 句子

1）I hope you all become good friends. 我希望你们都成为好朋友。

2）A good beginning helps to make a good end.

好的开头有助于取得好的结果。

3）How are you? I’m very well. 你（身体）好吗？我很好（健康）。

4) How do you do? 你好吗？

5) Do you often get to school early ? 你经常早上很早上学吗？

新目标九年级英语课件(篇4)

学习目标

1.熟记学过的单词

2.重点短语：on your own，bit by bit，instead of

3.重点句型：Are you stressed out each time youhave a test?

学习重点

能够应用所学的知识完成本单元的写作

学习难点

能够应用所学的知识完成本单元的写作

自主学习

一、认真预习3a-SelfCheck找出下列短语和句型。

1.靠你自己

2.逐渐地

3.取代

4.你每次考试的时候紧张吗?

课堂导学

Step 1　情景导入

Teacher：We have learnt some ways to learnEnglish well.Can you remember them?Nowplease say some good ways to learn English well with your partners in groups.

环节说明：通过这个环节复习了本单元的重要的短语和句型，同时又为本节课的写作训练做好了铺垫。

Step 2　完成教材3a的任务

1.你的好朋友想要提高他的英语，他现在向你寻求帮助，请你在3a的表格中写出你给的方法及原因。(3分钟)

2.根据3a表格中的内容及3b方框中的提示，给你的朋友写一封信，告诉他学习英语的一些好的建议。完成后小组内互相交流纠错，教师抽查点评，完成3b。(10分钟)

参考案例

There are three good waysto learn English.I think you should be interested in what you do.If you

are interested in something, your brain will bemore active and remember it very quickly.It's also a good idea to watch Englishmovies.You can watch the actors say the words.In this way you can remember the wordsvery well.You could also try to improve your English by joining an English club，there you can speak Englishwith other people.It can improve your spoken English.I am sure that if you finda good way and don't give it up，you will do well in English.

环节说明：通过这个教学环节，让学生熟练掌握描述学习英语的方法的句型并且能够针对他人的问题提出建议。

Step 3　完成教材Self Check的任务

1.组长领读SelfCheck 1中的单词和短语，组员跟读并弄懂每个单词和短语的意思，为短文填空做好铺垫。(2分钟)

2.认真阅读2中的句子，然后将它们按正确的顺序排列，完成后集体核对答案，然后两人一组练习对话，并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)

3.根据3中Jane,Li Ming和Meiping的问题给出自己的建议，完成后小组内互相交流答案。(5分钟)

环节说明：这一环节通过训练，让学生对本单元的语言目标——提建议得以更灵活的运用。

Step 4　问题探究

(　)1.We can learn English bit ________bit，dayby day.

A.buyB.withC.to　D.by

答案选择D，bit by bit 意为“逐渐地，一点一点地”。

(　)2.The box is very heavy.I can't carryit ________ my own.

A.on B.with C.to D.by

答案选择A，on my own=all by myself意为“靠我自己”。

当堂评价

请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Unit2　Ithink that mooncakes are delicious!

新目标九年级英语课件(篇5)

本学期我任教九年级（2）班的英语课。经过以往几年的学习，大部分学生都能端正学习态度，主动参与学习活动。不少学生都打下了良好的英语基础，积累了一定的学习经验，掌握了行之有效的学习方法，形成了自己学习英语的学科理念，具备了较高的英语素质。但也有部分学生有求知欲，没自信心；有学习的潜力，却没良好的学习习惯，自控力极差。这诸多原因造成他们学习困难，衍生出厌学情绪。期末测试题目偏难，所以上学期的学科检测情况总体不好，两个班的合格率都有所下滑，优等生的人数更少。总之，这批学生的优势和不足并存，希望与困难相伴，我们要发挥学生们的优势，弥补他们的不足，一方面集中力量培养一批优等生，另一方面又要帮助带动每一位学习困难的同学都能学好英语课，达到共同提高的总体目标。

本学期的中心任务是：疏导心理，激发兴趣，指导学法，夯实基础，培养能力。

在今后的教学活动中，教师需注意以下几点：

1、结合社会大环境，引导学生信仰学习，崇尚知识。

2、帮助学生树立起学习英语的自信心。

3、帮助学生制定自己的学习小计划，找出适合自己的学习方法。

5、激励学生主动、持久、高效地学习。

6、学习过程中注意因材施教，爱心感染。

向青春期过度的孩子们情绪不稳，明辨是非的能力较差，叛逆心理严重，这就要求教师必须耐心细致，严以律己，言行一致，脚踏实地，持之以恒地去工作，督促指导学生努力地、科学地学习，成为造福社会的栋梁之材！

本学期的任务有两项：一是完成九年级英语第二学期的教学任务，二是系统复习七八九三个年级的所学全部内容，为最后的学业水平测试做准备。九年级英语第二学期的教学任务是11---15共5个单元的新授及Units 11-15的一个复习单元。其主要内容涉及现在完成时，现在进行时，被动语态等。其特点是生词量大，知识点零碎。我们应重在练习，加强巩固。

七年级教材内容侧重基础，难度不是很大，在考试中所占比例也不大。复习时要以点带面，精讲多练，教师只起一个点拨的作用即可。八年级教材所涉及的词汇、短语、句型结构明显增多，难度加大，阅读量增加，是复习的重中之重。九年级教材所涉及的词汇、短语、句型结构、语法更多，内容贴近生活，词汇量大而且难记，在中考中所占比例最大，是复习时的重点更是难点。

在复习过程中，要夯实基础，注重知识间的联系与区别，并以中考题型为参照，加强题型和做题方法的探讨和研究，给予学生精要的指导和引导，是他们掌握知识的同时，更能学得做人做事的道理和方法。

三、本学期要达到的教学目标（包括知识与技能、过程与方法、情感态度三个方面的目标）

（一）知识与技能：

1、能够系统掌握七至九年级相关的教学内容，牢固掌握基础知识。

2、各知识间的区别于联系要明确，并在测试中做到不混淆。

3、由知识到能力的转化，技能明显提高，能够将知识和能力做到有机统一。

1、狠抓过程中基础知识的落实，以此促进能力的提高。

2、引导学生通过自主学习，进行知识的归纳、总结，使总结知识的过程成为掌握、提高、锤炼的过程。

3、抓好过程的调控，因材施教，并注重反馈和总结。

1、培养学生的积极性和良好的习惯。

2、促进学生间的合作，并体验创作的快乐。

3、对比中外文化的差异，开阔视野。

4、磨练意志，达到自我教育的目的。明辨是非，形成正确的人生观、世界观、价值观。

1、教材处理方面：深入学习新课标，领略其精髓所在。总览教材，把握重点，勾划难点。遵循由易到难，由点及面的教学规律，把它作为一种课内教育资源，进行创造性地使用。

2、教学研究方面：与时俱进，学习先进的教育理论，更新教育观念，把任务型教学的精神实质实践于英语课堂中。真正做到“以学生的发展为本”，把课堂还给学生，提高学生用英语交际的能力。加强集体备课的力度，学人之长，补己之短，团结合作，共同提高。

3、培优转差方面：学会赏识每一个学生，尤其关爱中下游学生。加大对优等生的培养力度，鼓励他们拔尖，发挥榜样带头作用，带动中下游学生，大面积提高学习质量。

4、思想教育渗透方面：把爱国主义情感、集体主义道德、个人自立精神以及崇尚科学的精神融于日常教学之中。增强人口意识、环境意识，帮助学生形成正确的人生观、价值观。

尊重学生的个性差异，及时赏识学生。鼓励他们创新。利用学习互助小组，大力开展合作学习，在合作中培养责任感，并品尝成功的快乐，使其更爱学习。

利用计算机辅助教学，渗透信息技术教育，拓宽学生视野。

四、教学进度：

1 Unit 11 Unit 11 Section A-Section B(2C)

2 Units11-12 Unit 11 Section B(3a)- Reading -Unit 12Section A(2c)

3 Unit 12 Unit 12Section A(3a)-Reading

4 Units13 Unit 13Section A-- Section B(2C)

5 Units13--14 Unit 13 Section B(3a)-Reading -Unit 14 Section A(2c)

6 Unit14 Unit 14Section A(3a)-Reading

8/9 专项复习名词、冠词、数词、代词、介词、连词、形容词、副词

13 题型训练阅读理解,完型填空,

新目标九年级英语课件(篇6)

广州市东圃中学张虹

1、单词

before在---之前 bowl碗 hear 听见

hold拿 granddad爷爷，外公

2、短语

brush one’s teeth 刷牙 put…into 把---放进---

go shopping 去购物 Hurry up !赶快！

do morning exercises做早操 go running 去跑步

feed the cat 喂猫 How often…? 多久一次---？

go swimming去游泳

3、句子

1) They are good at playing basketball. 他们擅长打篮球。

2) It’s time to have lunch/for lunch. 该吃午饭了。

3) She’s never late for school. 她从不迟到。

4) All the family are trying to help her. 全家人都努力帮她。

新目标九年级英语课件(篇7)

Unit 15 We’re trying to save the manatees!

Part 1: Teaching design (第一部分：教学设计)

Structures: Review of structures

Target language: I think that animals should not live in zoos. I disagree with you. I feel that zoos provide clean and safe places for endangered animals to live.

Vocabulary: manatee, cheetah, kangaroo, chimpanzee, recycle, aquatic, habitat, gentle, aggressive, playful, furry, gray, enormous, strong, spotted, underwater, mangrove, vegetation, swamp, save, environment, educate, public, politely

Learning strategies: Classifying, Listening for specific information

Section A

Goals

● To review structures learned

● To listen and talk about animals

Procedures

Warming up by learning about animals

Animals are living things. Plants can make their own food or

energy from the light of the sun, but animals can't do this.

Animals have to eat plants or other animals to get energy to live.

Some animals eat only plants. We say that these animals are herbivores. Some animals eat onlymeat. We say that these animals are carnivores. Some animals eat both plants and meat. We say that these animals are omnivores. Plants can't move around, but most animals can move around. Animals are divided into groups.

1a Looking and describing

On page 118 in the picture you will see a zoo with animals and visitors. Now choose adjectives listed in the box to describe the six animals.

African elephants

Chimpanzees

Kangaroos Manatees

Cheetahs Polar bears

enormous

noisy playful gentle,

shy

spotted,

fast

Furry,

aggressive

1b Listening and circling

Victor and Ginny are talking about animals. They are describing them with many different words.

Now listen to their talk and circle the words used in 1a to describe the animals.

星沙英语网整理

Tapescript

Boy: Hey, Ginny. What’s that big, furry animal in the pond?

Girl: It’s a polar bear, Victor. They’re kind of aggressive.

Boy: Are they? Looks like they really love water.

Girl: Uh-huh.

Boy: And what do you call those big, gray things in the water?

Girl: They’re called manatees.

Boy: What?

Girl: Manatees. They’re very gentle and very shy.

Girl: They’re cheetahs. The cheetah is the fastest animal on earth

1c Doing groupwork

We humans are animals, too. So we are like animals in some ways. Now in groups of four, you are going to think of an animal that is the same as you are in some ways. Then you are to describe the animal and the others are to guess its name.

A: I am like this animal because I am strong and intelligent. I like water, and I like to eat vegetables.

B: You’re like an elephant.

A: No.

B: You’re like a manatee.

A: Yes!

A: I am like this animal because I am heavy and enormous. I like forests, and I like to go around the mountain.

B: You’re like a chimpanzee.

A: No.

B: You’re like an elephant.

A: Yes!

A: I am like this animal because I like spotted clothing and I run the fastest in my school.

B: You’re like a manatee.

A: No.

B: You’re like a cheetahs.

A: Yes!

2a Listening and matching

A boy is asking a man about animals he likes.

Tapescript

Boy: Can you tell us about the manatees, please?

Man: Sure. We’re trying to save them.

Boy: Why? Are they endangered?

Man: Yes. There used to be a lot of manatees, but now there aren’t very many of them.

Boy: Do you know how many there are?

Man: At this point, there are only about 2, 500 in the U.S. In 1927, it was discovered that they were endangered. Since then, the government has passed laws to protect them.

Boy: Where do they live?

Man: Their favorite habitat is the water under the trees in mangrove swamps.

Boy: And why are they endangered?

Man: Some of the swamps have become polluted. Also, there sometimes isn’t enough food for all of them. As you can see, they’re large. The average manatee is about ten feet long and weighs about 1, 000 pounds. They need about 100 pounds of aquatic feed a day.

Boy: Aquatic feed?

Man: Oh, that’s underwater plants and vegetation. That’s what they eat.

Now listen to their talk and match the words with the definitions in the box on page 119.

1. endangered →b. there aren’t very many of them.

2. mangrove swamps → d. a place where trees grow in water

3. habitat → a. the place where something lives

4. aquatic feed → underwater plants and vegetation

2b Listening and completing

Next you are going to complete the chart on page 119 in the middle. Listen to the talk once more for the necessary information.

Kind of animal Manatee

Number 2,500 in the US

Habitat the water under the trees in

mangrove swamps

Reason why they are endangered Some of the swamps have become polluted. Also, there sometimes isn’t enough food for all of them.

description The average manatee is about

ten feet long and weighs about

1, 000 pounds. They need

about 100 pounds of aquatic feed a day.

In the end you are going to read the tapescript. While reading, you must try to blacken all the predicates, underline all the expressions and circle all the connectives.

2c Doing pairwork

You are going to interview a zoo attendant. Now use the facts from above activities to role play a conversation between you and the attendant.

A: How big are manatees?

B: They’re about 10 feet long and they weigh about 1,000 pounds.

A: How much do they eat everyday?

B: They need about 100 pounds of aquatic feed a day.

A: What is Aquatic feed?

B: It is underwater plants and vegetation.

A: That’s what they eat?

B: Yes, it is.

A: Are manatees endangered?

B: Yes, they are endangered. But, we’re trying to save them.

A: Wait a moment. Why are they endangered?

B: Because their homes are disappearing.

A: Where do they live?

B: They live in the swamps. And they have become polluted. They are endangered also because there sometimes isn’t enough food for all of them.

A: I am sorry to hear that. There used to be a lot of manatees, but now there aren’t very many of them left, I think.

B: You are right. At this point, there are only about 2, 500 in the

U.S.

A: Are there any laws to protect them.

B: Since 1927 laws have been passed protect them.

A: Thank you for your information.

3a Reading and underlining

Turn to page 120. Disgusted has written a letter to the editor. Now read it to underline the reasons why Disgusted is opposed to zoos. While reading remember to box all the connectives, blacken all the predicates. That’s grammar study.

Dear Editor,

I am writing to say that I am against building a new zoo in our town. Zoos are terrible places for animals to live. I've visited a lot of zoos in my life, and I have never seen one I liked or one that was suitable for animals to live in. Just last week, I visited a zoo and couldn’t believe what I saw. The animals are kept in tiny cages and can hardly move at all. And they are only given food once a day. Is this a good way for animals to live? I don't think so.

Sincerely

Disgusted

3b Reading and writing

A man called Animal Friend wrote a letter to the editor, too. Now read this letter on 120. While reading, underline all the expressions, box all the connectives, and blacken all the predicates. That’s grammar study, too.

Dear Editor.

I visited our zoo yesterday and I was very surprised to find hardly anyone there. Zoos are very important places. They are like living textbooks for young people. They provide homes for many endangered animals, and help to educate the public about caring for them. If we don’t support our zoos, they won't have enough money to take care of so many fine animas. I urge all of your readers to visit our wonderful zoo soon.

Sincerely, Animal friend

4 Debating

Next we are going to have a new activity-to debate.

Let’s make two teams. Team A is to debate against keeping animals in the zoos, and Team B is to debate for keeping animals in the zoos for protection and education of the people.

Useful expressions

I think that… I agree with you.

I believe that… I disagree with you.

I feel that… I agree with…

A: I think that animals should not live in the zoos.

B: I disagree with you. I feel that zoos provide clean and safe places for endangered animals to live.

A: I don’t think so.

B: A zoo is a place where many different species of animal are kept and usually can be seen by members of the public.

A: Why can people go and see the animals in the forest?

B: In that case, more harm will be done to the animals.

A: Kept in the zoos animals are losing their natural nature of living.

B: Most modern zoos are also centers where animals are studied so that more animals in the forest could be saved and protected.

A: Some rare animals are dying out.

B: Yes, they are. Rare animals could be preserved when they are in danger of dying out.

A: You are right in saying that. But I still think that it is not right to put animals in the zoos. They belong to the forest, the river, the sky and the sea.

Closing by learning about Brown Eared-pheasant（褐马鸡）

To end this period we shall turn our attention to a rare animal found almost only in Shanxi, China, Brown Eared-pheasant, or褐马鸡 in Chinese.

This species qualifies as Vulnerable because it may have a small population, and although its numbers within protected areas appear to be stable, elsewhere remaining unprotected and isolated populations are declining (potentially rapidly) through ongoing habitat loss and hunting.

新目标九年级英语课件(篇8)

教学综述

一. 本周教学内容：

Unit 10 By the time I got outside, the bus had already left.

一. 学习目标（Language Goal）

1. Learn to narrate past events. 学会描述过去所发生的事情。

2. Learn to express something with Past Perfect Tense.

学习使用过去完成时态。

3. Strengthen the consciousness of doing things regularly.

做事加强连续性，有条不紊。

二. 语言结构（Language Structures）

1. Past perfect Tense过去完成时

2. “By the time”和“when”引导的时间状语从句

三. 目标语言（Target language）

1. By the time she got up, her brother had already gone into the bathroom.

2. By the time she went outside, the bus had already gone.

3. By the time she got to class, the teacher had already started teaching.

4. When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home.

5. Have you ever overslept?

6. Have you ever been late for school?

四. 重点词组（Key phrases）

1. by the time 到…时候为止

2. get outside 到外边

3. get to school 到学校

4. get up 起床

5. get into the shower 去洗澡

6. get home 到家

7. start doing/ to do sth 开始做某事

8. be late for 迟到

9. go off （闹钟）闹响

10. wake up 醒来

11. come out 出来，出现

12. run off 迅速离开，跑掉

13. on time 准时

14. in time 及时

15. come by （走）过来

16. give sb a ride 让某人搭车

17. break down 损坏，坏掉

18 show up 出席，露面

19. stay up 熬夜

20. a costume party 一个化装舞会

21. sth happen to sb 某事发生在某人身上

22. so …that … 如此…以至于

23. set off 出发，开始

24. April Fool’s Day 愚人节

25. get married 结婚

26. marry sb 与某人结婚

27. both …and… 二者…都…

28. get dressed 穿好衣服

29. on the first day 在第一天

五. 语法重点（Grammar Focus）

1. Past perfect Tense过去完成时

构成：had +过去分词（had没有人称和数的变化）

过去完成时可以表示过去某一时刻或某一动作之前完成的动作或呈现的状态。也就是说发生在“过去的过去”。既然过去完成时的动作发生在过去某一时间之前，那么，使用过去完成时就必须先有这样一个过去的时间。

e.g. I had finished my homework before supper.

我在晚饭前把作业做完了。

句中的supper既是过去某一时间，而had finished这一动作就是在supper之前完成的。如果只说I had finished my homework. 听者会觉得难以理解。由此可见，过去完成时是个相对的时态，它不能离开过去的时间而独立存在。

e.g. By the end of that year Henry had collected more than one thousand foreign stamps.

到那年年底，亨利已经收集了一千多张外国邮票。（过去时间是the end of that year）

e.g. When we got there, the football match had already started.

当我们到那里时，足球比赛已经开始了。（过去时间是when从句）

2. when和by the time引导的时间状语从句

by the time到…时候为止，指从过去某一点到从句所示的时间为止，这一时间段。

when 当…时候，指过去的某一时间点。从句用一般过去时，主句为过去完成时。

e.g. By the time she got up, her brother had already gone into the bathroom.

到她起床的时候，她的弟弟已经去洗澡间了。

By the time she went outside, the bus had already gone.

到她走到外面的时候，公共汽车已经走了。

When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home.

当她到学校的时候，她意识到她把书包放在家里了。

（在这句话中，过去的时间点为“到校”的时候，“她把书包放在家里”则发生在“过去的过去”。）

3. How to narrate past events.

如何描述过去的事件。

描述过去的事件，首要注意一点是时态。由于事情发生在过去，因此一定要用过去的某种时态。但如果是直接引语（如在双引号“”之内），则根据当时的情况来决定。

请看例文1：

It was Sunday. I went to a pool to fish. I thought there must be some fish for me to catch. I held my fishing pole, waiting patiently. Suddently a big fish was caught. I was glad and put it into my little basket. Before long my sister came. Without a word she put back the fish into the water. I was astonished. I really thought she became mad. She ordered me to put down the fishing pole and led me to a place not far away. There stood a sign, reading “No fishing”. I realized that I was making a mistake.

（注意观察文中时态的应用）

例2：请大声朗读Section A 3a，并找出其中用到的时态。

六. 疑难解析（Key Points）

1. 关于get的词组小结

在本单元出现大量关于get的词组，要注意背诵

get to school 到学校 get to class 到班级

get into the shower 去洗澡

get outside 到外边

get home 到家

get up 起床

get married 结婚

get dressed 穿好衣服

2. I’ve never been late for school, but yesterday I came very close.

我上学从不迟到，但是昨天我险些迟到。

close adv. （副词）邻近地、接近地，意思是接近上课时间才到校。

3. Have you ever been an April fool?

你曾经做过愚人节傻瓜吗？

April Fool’s Day愚人节每年的四月一日，在那天，如果被人愚弄的人就被称为April fool. （愚人节傻瓜）

4. He had changed the clock to an hour earlier.

他把表调快了一个小时。

change…to（into）… 把…变成…

e.g. Please change these sentences into English.

请把这些句子译成英文。

5. I only just made it to my class.

我刚好赶上上课。

only just“刚刚才、恰好”

eg. They’ve only just gotten up. 他们刚刚起身。

make it 办成功，做到、赶到

eg. You can’t make it to the other shore in this weather.

天气这样恶劣，你可到不了对岸。

6. Welles was so convincing that hundreds of people believed the story, and panic set off across the whole country.

Welles是如此地让人信任，以致于成百上千的人都相信了这个故事，进而激起了全国性的恐慌。

（1）so …that…句型中，so后面应加一个形容词或副词，意为“如此…以至于…”

eg. This book is so interesting that everybody in our class wants to read it.

这本书是如此的有趣以至于全班同学都想看看。（so+形容词）

He ran so fast that I couldn’t catch up with him.

他跑得那么快，以致于我跟不上他。（so+副词）

so…that引导的是表示结果的状语从句，但不一定要死套“如此…以至于”的模式来译成汉语。

eg. It was so dark that he couldn’t see the faces of his companions.

天太黑了，他不能看见同伴的脸。

（2）so that主要用来引导目的状语从句，其从句中的谓语动词通常和can, may, should等情态动词连用，而且主句和从句之间不使用逗号意为“以便，使能够”。

e.g. They set out early so that they might arrive in time.

他们早早地出发以便按时到达。

Let’s take the front seats so that we may see more clearly.

我们坐在前排吧，以便可以看得更清楚。

7. By the time the authorities revealed that the story was a hoax, thousands of people had fled from their homes.

当权威机构揭露这个故事是一个骗局时，成千上万的人已经逃离家园。

8. The TV star lost both his girlfriend and his show.

那个电视明星既失去了他的女朋友，也失去了他的电视节目。

both …and… 二者都

The First Period

Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands

1．Knowledge Objects

(1) Key Vocabulary

oversleep

(2) Target Language

What happened?

I overslept. And by the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower.

2．Ability Objects

(1) Teach the students to use the new words.

(2) Train the students to narrate past events with the Past Perfect Tense.

(3) Train the students' listening and speaking skills with the target language.

3．Moral Object

It's a good habit to go to bed early in the evening and get up early in the morning. So you'll never be in a hurry in the morning.

Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points

1．Key Vocabulary

oversleep

2．Target Language

Narrate past events with the Past Perfect Tense

Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points

1．Train the students to narrate past events with the Past Perfect Tense.

2．Train the students to understand the target language in spoken conversation.

Ⅳ．Teaching Methods

1．Thinking of examples from the students' real lives.

2．Making sentences by looking at the pictures.

Ⅴ．Teaching Aid

A tape recorder

Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures

Step Ⅰ Revision

1．Revise the language points in Unit 8. Ask some questions like this: What volunteer work would you like to do? Help the students to answer, I'd like to …/I love to …/I hope to …

2．Practice the dialogue in Activity 3c on page 62 again. Get students to role play the similar dialogues with the following.

SA: I'd like to join the school volunteer project, but I'm not sure what I should do.

SB: What do you like doing?

SA: I love playing football.

SB: Well, you could help coach a football team for little kids. Let the children practice in pairs.

3．Check the students' homework by asking some students to read their sentences with the phrasal verbs. Then ask the students to hand in their homework.

4．Dictate the following words:

clean up, cheer up, give out, put off, set up, run out of, take after, fix up, give away, call up, hand out, work out, hunger, establish, commitment, veterinarian, strategy

Step Ⅱ 1a

This activity introduces new vocabulary which can be used to narrate past events. First write by the time on the blackboard, and tell the class the meaning of it.

“by the time” means not later than, before, as soon as, or when the indicated comes. When we use the words. “By the time … ,” we are talking about two different things that happened in the past. Say this sentence to the class; By the time the teacher came in, the students had begun reading English.

Tell them to note the struture “had begun” in this sentence. Begun is the past participle of begin. When we talk about two events both happened in the past, the one which happened earlier should use and plus a past participle. The words following By the time … talk about the thing that happened later. And tell the students when they use had plus a past participle, they are using the Past Perfect Tense. Also explain what is the past participle form of a verb for the students. Tell them it is as the same as the past form for a regular verb. And they have to remember the irregular verbs' participles one by one.

Play a game to help the students understand the sentences with the words By the time … Do it like this:

Pretend that the teacher will leave the classroom and the students will do some things. When the teacher returns, the class will make statements starting with By the time …

Write By the time I came back … on the blackboard.

Say to the class, By the time I came in, what had happened?

Help one student to answer like this,

By the time the teacher came in, Don had written his name on the blackboard.

Then get more students to answer differently, such as,

By the time the teacher came in, we had discussed an English problem.

By the time the teacher came in, I had drawn a picture.

Write these sentences on the blackboard, and teach the students to read several times.

Read the instructions to the students and read these questions to the class as well, What do you usually do in the morning before school? Do you like morning? Why or why not?

Choose one good student to answer them by saying something he or she usually does in the morning.

He or she may answer like this,

I usually get up early, wash my face and have breakfast. I like mornings because the air is fresh. or I usually get up as late as possible. Then I have to wash my face and have breakfast in a hurry. I often rush to school without breakfast. Sometimes I forget something at home. I don't like morning, because I am always too busy.

Then have the whole class practice in pairs. Ask each other the questions.

After they finish talking, ask one or two pairs to say their conversations to the class. Correct the mistakes they may make with the other students.

Call the students' attention to the pictures in Activity 1a. Ask students to tell what they see.

Say, Any sentences which make sense are accepted to describe the pictures. The girl in the pictures is Tina. Present the new words by providing sentences showing the meanings of them like this: T; What can you see in Picture 1?

S1: She slept a long time.

T: That's correct. She slept too late. She overslept. Class repeat. She overslept.

Ss: She overslept.

T: What do you see in Picture 2?

S2: Her brother or sister is in the bathroom

T: That's correct. She wants to go into the bathroom. She can't because someone is taking a shower. Class repeat. Someone is taking a shower.

Ss: Someone is taking a shower.

Write these words on the blackboard:

overslept, taking a shower, had left, left her backpack at home.

Then tell students to talk about the pictures in groups of four. Move around the classroom, listening to students and offering help. Make sure that they talk in English.

After they all finish talking, ask different groups to tell the class about the pictures. They may say like this:

Tina overslept in the morning. She wanted to go to the bathroom, but her brother had already gotten in the shower. When she got to the bus stop, the bus had already left. She had to run to school. After she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home. The sentences can vary, but should be correct.

Step Ⅲ 1b

This activity gives students practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation.

Ask the students to read the instructions together. Have them look at the two columns, A and B. in the chart. Point out the sample answer. Read the two parts of the sentence.

Then go over the other unconnected parts of sentences, too.

You will connect the two parts of the sentences, connect a sentence beginning in the first column with the end of that sentence in the second column. Please guess the other two sentences before I play the tape.

I guess most of the children can get the correct sentences by guessing. So just let them guess. Don't tell them whether their answers are right or wrong.

OK, just keep your answers by guessing. Let's decide if they are right by listening to the tape now.

Play the recording for the first time. Students only listen. Then play it a second time. Let students match two parts of each sentence. Check the answers by asking some students to tell their answers. Make sure that all of them have got the correct answers by listening. Say congratulations to the students who get the answers correctly by guessing.

Answers

1．b 2．a 3．c

Tapescript

Boy: Hi, Tina. You look stressed out.

Girl: I am. I had a bad morning.

Boy: Really? What happened?

Girl: Well, first of all I overslept. By the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower.

Boy: Oh, what a pain!

Girl: So, after he got out of shower, I took a quick shower and got dressed. But by the time I went outside, the bus had already left.

Boy: Oh, no!

Girl: Oh, yes! So I ran all the way to school. But when I got to school, I realized I had left my backpack at home.

Boy: No wonder you look stressed out.

Step Ⅳ 1c

This practice provides guided oral practice using the target language.

First play the recording in Activity 1b again and let the students read after it. Do it at least twice.

Then read the instructions together with the whole class.

You will make conversations in pairs. Each of you will have to take turns being Tina. Look at the pictures in Activity 1a to help you. Tell your partner what happened to you this morning. Ask a pair to read the example to the class before they begin.

SA: What happened?

SB: I overslept. And by the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower.

Write the conversation on the blackboard.

Have the students work in pairs. Move around the room offering language support as needed.

After they all finish talking, ask some pairs to say their conversations to the class.

Step Ⅴ Summary

Say, In this class, we've learned how to narrate past events, using the Past Perfect Tense. We've also done some listening practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation. Also, we've done much oral practice using the target language.

Step Ⅵ Homework

1．Write out the story of Tina, Note to use the target language.

2．Revise when to use the Past Perfect Tense and the verb structure of it.

Step Ⅶ Blackboard Design

Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the

bus had already left.

Section A

The First Period

1．By the time …

By the time the teacher came in, the students had begun reading.

By the time the teacher came in, Don had written his name on the blackboard.

By the time the teacher came in, we had discussed an English problem.

2．Some words to describe the pictures

overslept, taking a shower, had left, left her backpack at home.

3．Target Language:

A: What happened?

B: I overslept. And by the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower.

The Second Period

Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands

1．Knowledge Objects

(1) Target Language

By the time she got to class, the teacher had already started teaching.

When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home.

When I got home, I realized I had left my keys in the backpack.

(2) The Three Forms of the verbs.

2．Ability Objects

(1) Train the students' listening skill.

(2) Train the students' writing skill with the target language.

(3) Train the students' speaking skill.

(4) Train the students to use the three forms of the verbs.

3．Moral Object

Try to be a careful person and do everything carefully. Remember not to be as careless as Tina.

Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points

1．Listening practice with the target language.

2．Use the correct verb forms to fill in the blanks by listening.

3．Make sentences using the Past Perfect Tense.

4．The three forms of the verbs.

Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points

1．Write an ending for the story in Activity 2c.

2．The three verb forms in Grammar Focus.

Ⅳ．Teaching Methods

1．Listening

2．Pairwork

Ⅴ．Teaching Aids

A tape recorder

Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures

Step Ⅰ Revision

1．Revise what happened to Tina in the morning by asking one or two students to tell the stroy on page 68.

They may say like this:

Tina had a bad morning. First of all she overslept. By the time she got up, her brother had already gotten in the shower. And by the time she went outside, the bus had already left. She had to run all the way to school. When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home. All these made her look stressed out. After that, ask the whole class to work in pairs. telling the stroy and helping each other in turns. Remind them to use the correct verb forms.

2．Ask students to check each other's homework in pairs, pointing out all the mistakes they might have made.

3．Revise the Past Perfect Tense by asking the children when to use it and what its verb structure is.

Step Ⅱ 2a

This activity provides guided listening practice using the target language.

We have known Tina had a bad morning. But something worse happened to Tina later. Let's go to Activity 2a on page 69 and see what happened to Tina later in the morning.

Read the instructions to the class. Be sure that all of them know what to do. Call the students' attention to the four pictures. Get them to guess the correct order of the pictures first. The first one is given as a sample. Ask one or two children to tell their stories by describing the pictures according to their own order.

Then, we will hear Tina talking about what happened to her after she got to school. We can see there is a small box in each picture. Please write a number from 1 to 4 in each box to show each picture's correct order. The first one has been given as a sample. Get the children to get ready to listen to Tina continue her story.

Play the recording the first time, students only listen. Play the recording again and ask the children to number each picture. Check the answers with the class and see who have ever got the correct answers without listening.

Answers

The pictures should be numbered in this order:

3 1 2 4

Tapescript

Boy: So then what did you do, Tina?

Girl: Well, I ran home to get my backpack. But when I got home, I realized I had left my keys in the backpack.

Boy: You're kidding!

Girl : So I ran back to school without my keys or my backpack. And by the time I got back to school, the bell had rung.

Boy: Oh, no!

Girl: And by the time I walked into class, the teacher had started teaching already. She asked for our homework, but of course I didn't have it.

Step Ⅲ 2b

This activity gives students practice in understanding and writing the target language.

Ask the students to read the instructions together. Point out the blanks in the sentences and the verbs in the brackets.

This activity has two parts. First let's fill in the blanks with the correct verb forms. We can see some verbs in the brackets. They are the base forms of the given verbs. For example, get and got, Get is the base form of the verb. Your job is to write the correct forms of these verbs in the blanks. Look at number one. A sample answer is given.

Let the students fill in the blanks with the correct forms individually.

Move around the classroom collecting the common mistakes they may make.

After they all finish writing, tell them to get ready to listen to the conversation and check their answers.

I will play the recording again. Please check your answers and correct any mistakes you might have made while listening. Play the recording. Students listen and check their answers. Correct the answers by asking seven different students to say theirs to the class.

Answers

1．got home 2．realized 3．had left 4．got 5．had rung 6．walked 7．had started

Step Ⅳ 2c

This activity gives students oral practice with the target language.

Ask the whole class to read the instructions together.

We have a new task now. We know Tina was late for class. What do you think happened after Tina was late for class Work with a partner. Make up an ending for the story by continuing it. The beginning has been given.

Get students to discuss in pairs, Complete the ending. Make sure they are talking in English. Move around the classroom, offering language support if needed. After ten minutes, ask students to stop discussing. Get some pairs of students to tell the class how they think the story ended. And let the whole class decide whose ending is the best. Tell each pair to write down their ending, or do it after class if time is not enough.

Sample ending of the story

The teacher looked at Tina and said, “Why are you late and where is your homework, Tina?”

“I had a bad morning today. ”Tina said sadly.

“I'm sorry to hear that, but may I know what happened?”said the teacher.

Then Tina told the teacher and the whole class her story. All her classmates laughed loudly after it. Some of them said,“Poor Tina!”

Bob, one of Tina's classmates, stood up and said, “ Well, Tina, I'd love to help you. Why not let me keep the keys for you? I would put your keys in my backpack. ”

Step Ⅴ Grammar Focus

This activity introduces the target language of this unit. Call students' attention to the sentences on the left. Ask four different students to read the four sentences and point out where had plus a past participle is used. Write the sentences on the blackboard.

Draw a simple time line for each sentence to help students to understand the grammar focus. For example:

Then get the students to look at the box. Teach students to read the three forms of each verbs first. Then ask several students to read the verbs to the class to see if they can read. Write the verbs on the blackboard.

Ask the students to make sentences correctly using each form of the verbs in the box. For example:

I usually get up at 6:30.

I got up at 5:30 yesterday.

By the time I got up, my sister had already gotten in the shower.

Tell the students when we talk about the first thing that happened. We use had plus a past participle (had gotten) and when we talk about the second thing that happened, we use the simple past tense (got up) . Ask some to read their sentences to the class.

Ask the students to make their own lists of other verbs used in this unit. Tell them to put the lists in their notebooks using a three-column format like the one in the Look! section. The lists have to include these verbs: leave, walk, start, oversleep, ring, be.

Check the answers.

Some sample sentences with the three verb forms

1．I got up at 6 : 30 every day.

I got up at 6 : 00 yesterday.

By the time I got up, my sister had already gotten in the shower.

2．We usually go to school at 7 : 30.

We went to school at 8:30 yesterday.

By the time we got to the classroom, the students had gone to the chemistry lab.

3．My father leaves home at 8:30.

He left home at 9:30 this morning.

When my father went outside, the bus had left.

4．The teacher often starts teaching at 9:00.

The teacher started teaching at 8:30 the day before yesterday.

When Tina got to class, the teacher had already started teaching.

The three forms of the verbs used in this unit:

leave left left

walk walked walked

start started started

oversleep overslept overslept

ring rang rung

be was/were been

Step Ⅵ Summary

Say, In this class, we've done much listening and writing practice with target language. We've also done some oral practice in pairs. And we've discussed the Grammar Focus of this unit.

Step Ⅶ Homework

1．Write down the ending of Tina's story.

2．Make sentences using each form of the verbs below:

leave, walk, start , oversleep, ring, be

3．Review the Grammar Focus.

Step Ⅷ Blackboard Design

Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the

bus had already left.

Section A

The Second Period

Target Language:

1．By the time she got up, her brother had already gone into the bathroom.

2．By the time she went outside, the bus had already gone.

3．By the time she got to class, the teacher had already started teaching.

4．When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home.

Verbs:

get got gotten

go went gone

leave left left

start started started

The Third Period

Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands

1．Knowledge Objects

(1) Key Vocabulary

bell, ring, go off, rush, run off, on time, give sb. a ride, lock, break down

(2) Target Language

By the time I got there, the bus had already left.

By the time I woke up, my father had already gone into the bathroom.

2．Ability Objects

Train the students' reading skill with target language.

Train the students' speaking skill with target language.

3．Moral Object

Have you ever done anything carelessly?

Share your story with your friends.

Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points

1．Guide the students to read the article in activity 3a.

2．Help the students do the oral practice with the target language.

Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points

1．Help improve the students' reading skill by, Activity 3a.

2．Help the students describe what has happened to them with the target language.

Ⅳ．Teaching Methods

1．Get the main idea by reading.

2．Pairwork.

Ⅴ．Teaching Aid

A projector

Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures

Step Ⅰ Revision

1．Revise what happened to Tina by asking several students to tell the story.

2．Revise the three forms of the verbs in Grammar Focus by asking four students to write them out on the blackboard.

3．Check homework by asking one or two to read their own endings of the stroy.

4．Check homework by asking some students to read the sentences which they made.

5．Ask the students to hand in their homework.

Some sample sentences with the verbs used in this unit:

1．I leave home at 7:30 every morning.

I left home at 8:00 this morning.

By the time I got to the airport, the plane had left.

2．I walk to school sometimes.

I walked to school yesterday afternoon.

When I got there, the sick girl had walk away.

3．The meeting start at 3: 00 every Wednesday afternoon.

The meeting started at 3: 30 last Wednesday afternoon.

As soon as Mr. Jones got to the meeting room, the meeting had already started.

4．Tina seldom oversleeps.

Tina overslept this morning.

Tina said she had never overslept before.

5．The bell rings at 8:10 every morning.

The bell rang at 7:10 this morning.

When I got to school, the first bell had rung.

6．I am here now.

I was at home last night.

I had been here for 20 years by the end of .

Step Ⅱ 3a

This activity provides reading and writing practice using the target language.

Show the vocabulary on the screen by a project:

bell n 钟；铃

ring v. 鸣；响

go off 闹钟(闹响)

rush v. 冲；奔

rush off 跑掉；迅速离开

on time 准时

give sb. a ride 让某人搭便车

lock v. 锁；锁上

break down 损坏；坏掉

Point to the words one by one and teach the students to read them. Do it several times. Then ask several students to read the words to see if they can pronounce each word correctly.

Ask the whole class to read the instructions together. There is an article in Activity 3a. Your task is to read the stroy and write the events in the correct order. Have a look at the sample answer on the right of the article before you start. Then let the children complete the work on their own. After a while; ask some students to report their answers to the class. Write the events on the blackboard as they report, putting the events in the correct order.

After checking the answers, tell students to read the article again more carefully. Tell them to find out the words or sentences which they can't understand this time.

A few minutes later ,let the students ask questions on the words and sentences which they can't understand. Do some explanation and make sure that the students make everything clear about the article. Then ask the students to read the article aloud. Move around the classroom while they are reading, offering help as needed. Next ask students to pick out the sentences with the Past Perfect Tense. Tell them to underline them and come up with the reason to use the tence.

Ask two students to read their answers and explain the sentences.

Answers

1．alarm clock didn't go off

2．father went to bathroom

3．woke up late

4．took shower

5．had some breakfast

6．bus left

7．ran to bus stop

8．started walking

9．got a ride with a friend

10．bell ringing

11．got to school

12．got to class

Sentences with the Past Perfect Tense in the article:

1．…by the time I woke up, my father had already gone into the bathroom and …

2．Unfortunately, by the time I got there, the bus had already left.

Step Ⅲ 3b

This activity provides reading and writing practice using the target language.

Call the students' attention to the photo of the woman sleeping. The girl is sleeping. She may oversleep. How about you? Have you ever overslept?

Get a students to answer the question simply, such as Yes, I have. /No, I haven't.

Then ask one student to read the instructions to the class.

We can see six questions in the box.

You'll have to read the questions in the box and you have to describe the circumstances in which these things happened. Explain that describe the circumstances means to tell when, where and how the things happened.

Ask one student who has ever overslept to answer the first question and describe the circumstance. Help him or her use the Past Perfect Tense to describe the circumstance.

Then ask students to read the questions and write their answers in their exercise books. Tell them that they have to describe the circumstances if their answers are Yes, and there should be at least one sentence with the Past Perfect Tense in each description. Move around the classroom providing sentences to the ones who need. Ask several students to share their stories with the class. Correct any mistakes they may make. Let them check the answers in pairs.

Step Ⅳ 3c

This activity provides listening and speaking practice using the target language. Ask the whole class to read the instructions together. Then call the students' attention to the sample conversation on the right. Ask a pair of the students to read the conversation to the class. Please ask your partner the questions in Activity 3b. Ask more questions if he or she says “Yes”.

Ask the students to work in pairs. Encourage them to ask as many questions as they can. As they work, move around the room offering help and answering questions as needed. Ask some pairs to say their conversations to the class.

Step Ⅵ Summary

Say, In this class, we've learned an article. And we've done much practice in reading, listening, speaking and writing. We've done much practice with the target language.

Step Ⅶ Homework

1．Write the answers to the questions in Activity 3b.

2．Write a conversation in Activity 3c.

Step Ⅷ Blackboard Design

Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the

bus had already left.

Section A

The Third Period

Answers to Activity 3a:

1．alarm clock didn't go off

2．father went to bathroom

3．woke up late

4．took shower

5．had some breakfast

6．bus left

7．ran to bus stop

8．started walking

9．got a ride with a friend

10．bell ringing

11．got to school

12．got to class

The Fourth Period

Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands

1．Knowledge Objects

(1) Key Vocabulary

costume, show up, exhausted, embarrassed, empty, fool, April Fool's Day, go off, stay up

(2) Target Language

When I got there, I found that he had fooled me.

After an hour, the other kids showld up, and I realized that my brother had fooled me.

By the time I got to match class, I was exhausted because I had stayed up all night studying.

I found out that my friend had fooled me.

2．Ability Objects

(1) Train the students' writing, listening and speaking skills with the target language.

(2) Train the students to use the new vocabulary.

3．Moral Object

Have you ever been fooled on April Fool's Day? Share your story with your friends.

Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points

1．Train the students' listening and speaking skills with target language.

2．Teach the students the new vocabulary.

Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points

1．Guide listening and oral practice using the target language.

2．Help learn to use the new vocabulary correctly.

Ⅳ．Teaching Methods

1．Listening

2．Pairwork and groupwork

Ⅴ．Teaching Aid

A tape recorder

Ⅵ.Teaching Procedures

Step Ⅰ Revision

1．Revise the article in Activity 3a on page 70 by asking several students to read it.

2．Dictate the following words and phrases:

bell, ring, go off, rush, run off, on time, give sb. a ride lock, break down.

3．Check the homework.

Step Ⅱ 1a

This activity reviews vocabulary, introduces some new vocabulary, and provides writing practice.

Read the instructions to the students. Remember to read the sentence in the brackets. Point to the chart with the three headings-Nouns, Verbs and Adjectives. Read the words in the brackets to the students and help the students to understand the meanings of nouns, verbs and adjectives.

Teach the students to read the new vocabulary below:

costume, show up, exhausted, embarrassed, empty, fool.

April Fool's Day

Write them on the blackboard or show them on a screen by a projector while teaching. Tell the children the meaning of each word and do a little explanation.

Then call the students' attention to the list of the words on the left. Ask a student to read them and tell the meanings at the same time. Find out the words which the students don't understand and give some explanation.

Please put these words in the correct columns in the chart. Some words can be put in more than one column.

Get a student to read the sample answers to the class before they start say, Fool can also be a verb. For example, He fooled me. So it is pat in both Column Nouns and Column Verbs.

Ask the students to complete the chart on their own.

Correct the answers by asking three students to read their answers to the class.

Answers

Nouns: fool, costume, change, clock

Verbs: fool, invite, empty, go off, get up, get dressed, show up, realize, change, stay up

Adjectives : embarrassed, empty, exhausted

Step Ⅲ 1b

This activity provides guided oral practice using the target language.

Ask a student to read the instructions to the class.

Ask another student to read the example on the right.

Work in pairs now. Tell your partner about something that has happened to you recently. Note to use two or more phrases from the list in Activity 1a. Get the students to talk in pairs. Move around the classroom checking their work and offering language support as needed.

After they all finish talking, ask some pairs to say their conversations to the class.

Step Ⅳ 2a

This activity provides guided listening practice using the target language. Say something about April Fool's Day to the students like this:

Every year on the first tit April, Americans do silly things to surprise each other. For example, someone might tell you to go to the teacher's office to get your new book. But there is no book at all !Call the students' attention to the four pictures. Ask the student, what is happening in each picture.

Ask four different students to describe the pictures. For example, they can describe Picture 1 like this:

A boy was told to take part in a costume party. So he dressed himself up like a monster. But when he got there, he found that his friend had fooled him. It wasn't a costume party. He frightened the others. Read the instructions to the class.

You'll listen to three boys, Dave, Nick and Joe, talking about April Fool's Day. There is a box under each picture where you can write each boy's name. Now listen to the tape and write the name of each boy under his picture. I have to tell you there will be one picture without a name under it.

Tell them to see the example for Picture c. Play the tape the first time. The students only listen. Then play the tape again. Ask the students to write each boy's name in the correct box. Check the answers by asking different students to tell their own answers.

Answers

a. No name b. Joe c. Nick d. Dave

Tapescript

Boy 1 : Have you ever been an April fool, Dave?

Boy 2 : Yes, I have. A friend once invited me to a costume party. When I got there, I found that he had fooled me. It wasn't a costume party. I was the only person wearing a costume. I was really embarrassed. How about you, Nick?

Boy 1: Well, last April Fool's Day, when my alarm went off I got up, took a shower, got dressed, and went to school. But when I got there, the school was empty. I was the only one there. After an hour, the other kids showed up, and I realized that my brother had fooled me.

Boy 3: He had?

Boy 1: Uh-huh. He had changed the clock to an hour earlier. What happened to you on April Fool's Day, Joe?

Boy 3: Well, I was sick last April first. My friend called me and told me we had a maths test the next day. By the time I go to maths class, I was exhausted because I had stayed up all night studying. Then I found out that my friend had fooled me. We didn't have a test at all!

Step Ⅴ 2b

This activity provides guided listening practice using the target language.

Read the instructions to the class. There are six phrases in the box. Your task is to find out who says each of the phrases, Dave, Nick or Joe after listening to the same recording. And write “D” for Dave, “N” for Nick and “J” for Joes on the short lines before the phrases. Look at the first one. The answer has been given as a sample.

Play the recording the first time. The students only listen. Then play the recording again. Ask the students to write the letters in the blanks. Ask six different students to report their answers to the class. Check the answers with the class.

Answers

1．D 2．N 3．J 4．J 5．D 6．N

Step Ⅵ 2c

This activity provides oral practice using the target language.

First play the recording again. Pause after each sentence and get the students to repeat.

Do it at least twice.

Ask a student to read the instructions to the class. Then have them look at the sample conversation on the right. Ask a pair of the students to read and try to continue it like this:

SA: What happened to Dave on April Fool's Day?

SB: Well, a friend invited him to a costume party. When he got there, he found that he had fooled him. It wasn't a costume party. He was the only person wearing a costume. He was really embarrassed.

Then ask the students to work in pairs. Each pair makes two. conversations using information from the earlier activities.

Move around the room as they work, offering help as needed. Ask one or two pairs to say their conversations to the class.

Step Ⅶ Summary

Say, In this class, we've learned some new words. And we've done much listening and oral practice. We have enjoyed some interesting stories happened on April Fool's Day.

Step Ⅷ Homework

1．Write something that has happened to you recently. Use two or more phrases from the list in Activity 1a.

2．Write a conversation in Activity 2c.

Step Ⅸ Blackboard Design

Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the

bus had already left.

Section B

The Fourth Period

1．Answers to Activity 1a:

Nouns: fool, costume, change, clock

Verbs: fool, invite, empty, go off, get up, get dressed, show up, realize, change, stay up

Adjectives: embarrassed, empty, exhausted

2．Target language:

A: What happened to Dave on April Fool's Day?

B: Well, a friend invited him to a costume party. When he got there, he found that he had fooled him. it wasn't a costume party. He was the only person wearing a costume. He was really embarrassed.

The Fifth Period

Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands

1．Knowledge Objects

(1) Key Vocabulary

announce, describe, convince, panic, set off, authority, reveal, hoax, flee/fled/fled, spaghetti, girl-friend, show, marry, thrill, get married, reply, ending

(2) The reading passages about April Fool's Day.

(3) W rite stories happened on April Fool's Day.

2．Ability Objects

(1) Train the students' reading skill.

(2) Train the students' writing and speaking skills.

3．Moral Object

Try to collect the jokes happened on April Fool's Day and share them with your friends.

Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points

1．Teach the students the new vocabulary.

2．Help the students understand the three articles.

3．Guide the students to write stories happened on April Fool's Day.

Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points

1．Help the students understand the three articles.

2．Help the students write the stories happened on April Fool's Day.

Ⅳ．Teaching Methods

1．Reading method.

2．Write a passage using the notes.

3．Tell jokes.

Ⅴ．Teaching Aids

A project and a tape recorder.

Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures

Step Ⅰ Revision

1．Revise the three boy's stories happened on April Fool's Day. Ask three different students to tell their stories to the class.

2．Check the homework. Ask some students to read their stories and conversations to the class. Then have them check each other's homework in pairs.

Step Ⅱ 3a

This activity provides reading practice using the target language.

Show the new words and expressions on the screen by a projector.

announce v. 宣告；通告

describe v. 描述；描绘

convince v. 使确信；使信服

panic n. 恐慌；惊恐

set off 激起；引起

authority n. 权威机构；行政管理机构

reveal v. 揭示；揭露

hoax n. 骗局；恶作剧；玩笑

flee n. 逃跑；逃走

spaghetti n. 意大利式细面条

girlfriend n. 女朋友

show n. 演出；展示；炫耀

marry v. 嫁；娶；与……结婚

thrill v. 回答；答复

ending n. 结局；结尾

get married 结婚

reply v. 回答；回复

Call the students' attention to the screen.

Point to the words on the screen one by one.

And Teach the students to read the words several times. Make sure that the students can read each word correctly.

Read the instructions to the students.

You'll have to read three articles. The three articles are about three different stories happened on April Fool's Day. Not all of them are true. Tell which of these stories is the most believable and which is the least believable. And you have to tell the reasons as well. At last, think over if you would be fooled by any of the stories.

Read the first article to the class. The students look at their books, listen to the teacher and find out the answers to the questions in the instructions.

After reading, ask the students if it is believable and why. Ask several students to tell their opinions on the believability of the first article. They may say like this: I think it is believable because the exact time and person's name are given in the first sentence. or, I don't think it's believable because I think no one dared to fool the people like that.

Do the same with the two articles left. Ask two good students to read the articles instead of the teacher. Elicit students' reasons for their answers. At last tell the students the correct answer.

Answers

The first story really happened. The radio program was called “The War of the World. ”

Step Ⅲ 3b

This activity provides reading and writing practice using the target language.

Read the instructions to the class. Play the recording again to help the students, Ask three different students to read the notes to the class.

Help the students make sentences with the notes first.

Look at the first line of the notes, please. Let's see what happened first by making sentences using the notes.

Let the students make sentences with the phrases given in the first line orally, based on the story happened to Nick. For example, when the alarm went off, Nick got up, took a shower, got dressed, and went to school. Then go on with the second line. They may say:

But when he got to school, the school was empty, An hour later, the other kids showed up.

The sample sentence for the third line.

He realized that his brother had fooled him.

After making sentences, ask the students to write a magazine story about Nick in Activities 2a and 2b. using the notes below. As they write, move around the room offering help and answering questions as needed.

After around ten minutes, ask a student to read the completed article to the class. The rest of the class help correct the mistakes the student may have made. Get them to check each other's writing carefully in pairs.

A sample answer

On April Fool's Day Nick's alarm went off. He got up and took a shower. Then he got dressed and went to school. When he got to school, the building was empty. An hour later the other kids showed up. Then he realized that his brother had fooled him. His brother had set his alarm an hour earlier.

Step Ⅳ 3c

This activity provides writing practice using the target language.

Read the instructions to the class. Be sure that the students know what they are asked to do. At first, have the students think what they might write about.

Then tell them to make a list of ideas before starting writing. The list should include the three parts, what happened first, what happened next, and what you finally realized. They can use the notes in Activity 3b as samples.

Write a sample list on the blackboard:

What happened first; school gate/met Don/Li Lei/waiting for/on the playground/ran to the playground.

What happened next: got to the playground/no one was there.

What I realized: Don/fooled me Next ask the students to write their jokes. Tell them they can use the article they wrote for Activity 3b as a model. After they start to write, move around the room providing help as needed.

Ask some students to read their' articles to the class. Correct as many of the articles as possible in class.

A sample writing

On April Fool's Day I met Don at the school gate. He told me that Li Lei was waiting for me on the playground. Then I ran to the playground. When I got there. I found no one was on the playground. Then I realized that Don had fooled me.

Step Ⅴ 4

This activity provides reading, speaking and listening practice using the target language.

Read the instructions to the class. Review the meanings of funniest, most embarrassing and most creative. Say, Each of you has to read your joke to the class. The class will vote on the funniest joke, the most embarrassing joke and the most creative joke.

Have the class have a look at the sample conversation in the box before reading. Ask a pair of the students to read it to the class.

SA: What's your joke?

SB: Well, last year, on the first day of school, my sister put a piece of paper on my back that said “Please say hello. ” All day at school, many strange said hello to me.

Write the conversation on the blackboard. Then ask the students to read their stories to the class. After all of the students have read, ask the class to vote for the funniest, most embarrassing and most creative stories.

Step Ⅵ Summary

In this class, we read three articles first. And then we wrote a magazine story based on some notes. Next we wrote a joke. At last, we voted for the funniest joke, the most embarrassing joke and the most creative joke. However, we've done much reading, writing and speaking practice.

Step Ⅶ Homework

1．Read the three articles aloud after class.

2．Correct the magazine story and the joke you have written.

3．Try to remember the new vocabulary.

Step Ⅷ Blackboard Design

Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the

bus had already left.

Section B

The Fifth Period

1．Sample notes to Activity 3c:

What happened first; school gate/met Don/Li Lei/waiting for/on the playground/ran to the playground.

What happened next; got to the playground/no one was there.

What I realized: Don/fooled me.

2．Target language:

A: What's your joke?

B: Well, last year, on the first day of school, my sister put a piece of paper on my back that said “Please say hello. ”All day at school, many strangers said hello to me.

The Sixth Period

Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands

1．Knowledge Objects

(1) Verbs

rush, realize, invite, show up, stay up.

(2) Write an article according to the pictures given.

(3) Vocabulary

homework, look, costume, empty

2．Ability Objects

(1) Train the students to use these verbs correctly:

rush, realize, invite, show up, stay up.

(2) Train the students writing skill.

3．Moral Objects

Have you ever had a similar Sunday with Ming? Tell your own story to your classmates.

Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points

1．Help the students have a self check on the key words and target language of this unit.

2．Practise using these verbs: rush, realize, invite, show up, stay up.

3．Review the new vocabulary introduced in this unit: homework, lock, costume, empty.

4．Direct the students to write an article according to the pictures given.

Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points

1．Help the students make sentences with the verbs.

2．Direct the students to write an article with the pictures given.

Ⅳ．Teaching Methods

1．Teaching by providing sample sentences.

2．Teaching by describing the pictures.

Ⅴ．Teaching Aid

Just the blackboard.

Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures

Step Ⅰ Revision

1．Revise the contents in the three articles in Activity 3a on page 72 by asking the question below

Questions

(1) What did a radio program announce in 1938?

(2) What had happened by the time the authorities revealed the story was a hoax?

(3) What did a reporter announce on April Fool's Day?

(4) What had happened by the time people realized that the story was a hoax?

(5) What did a famous TV star once do on April Fool's Day?

(6) What was the ending of the last story?

2．Ask three different students to read the articles.

3．Dictate the following words:

announce, convince, panic, authority, reveal, spaghetti, describe, hoax, thrill, flee/fled/fled.

Step Ⅱ Part 1

This activity focuses on vocabulary introduced in the unit. Focus attention on the box. Invite a student to read the vocabulary words at the top.

You are asked to fill in the blanks with the words. In some cases, you may need to use another form of the word, for example, adjusting for tense or subject/verb agreement.

Ask students to fill in the blanks on their own. Check the answers. Five students each reads a sentence, filling in the blanks. The rest of the students check their work.

Answers

1．realized 2．rush 3．stay up 4．invite 5．show up

Ask students to make their own sentences with the words, preferably sentences that are meaningful. Move around the room. Collect a few students' answers with mistakes on the blackboard. Along with the students' help correct the mistakes.

新目标九年级英语课件(篇9)

九下第15单元短语

big are manatees?海牛多大？ /ten feet long10英尺长 /two meters tall两米高

pounds重1000在磅（How heave are the …） used to be a lot of manatees.过去曾有许多海牛 against/for doing sth/sth反对、赞成做某事 suitable for对……适用

sth in tiny cages把某物保存在小笼子里 for sb(them)关心、照顾他们 animals濒是临灭绝的动物 in cars坐车兜风 a bike骑自行车 house of trash垃圾房

/make sth out of /of/from sth由…建成的 built/made out of/of/from sth被用….建成的 down推倒

an inspiration to us对某人来说是个灵感

her spare/free time在他的空闲时间

money for the Children’s Hospital为儿童医院募集钱 do sth强烈要求某人做某事

of ＝hear about听说 from 收到…的来信 sth for sb =provide sb with sth 为某人提供某物 sb about sth 教育某人某事不规则动词

burned preferred/ preferredburntburnt

threwthrown shot stuckstuck fedfedlightedlighted

1.海牛多大？英尺长 3.两米高

4重1000在磅（How heave are the …）5.过去曾有许多海牛 6.反对、赞成做某事 7.对……适用

8.把某物保存在小笼子里 9.关心、照顾他们10.濒是临灭绝的动物 11.坐车兜风 12.骑自行车 13.垃圾房 14.由…建成的 15.被用….建成的 16.推倒

17.对某人来说是个灵感

18.在他的空闲时间 19.为儿童医院募集钱 20.强烈要求某人做某事 21.听说23.收到…的来信 24.为某人提供某物 25.教育某人某事不规则动词

新目标九年级英语课件(篇10)

单元背景本单元是继第六单元定语从句重点语法学习的基础上，重点学习定语从句中先行词在从句中做状语的情况，即关系副词wherewhenwhy的选择使用。单元以旅行为话题展开学习，教学重点是关系副词的使用，难点是旅行中对所遇到的景观和人物等的表达。根据教材编排顺序和教学的需要我把教材分为四个课时：第一课时语法讲解和听力练习；第二课时话题展开和学习，包括3a的两篇短文阅读；第三课时Reading部分，重点培养学生的阅读理解能力；第四课时练习巩固。主要采用多媒体和学生的亲身经历的点滴事迹来展开学习，达到学生会说会用的目的。本节课是第一课时

课时设计说明 1.必备单词：capital，beach，jungle，fall，sight，tower,cathedal,church,wine,firm,pacific,programming,translator,conclusion

常考短语：by taxi,be supposed to do,take it easy,in general…

经典句型: I love the places where the people are really friendly

For your next vacation,why not consider visiting paris

It’s best to travel with…

2.本节课为本单元第一课时，主要是让学生理解和运用本课的重点单词和句型。本单元的话题学生都很熟悉，有很大的习兴趣。我将要求学生结合实际，用所学的句型谈论他们喜欢去的地方，并用形容词描述他们地点的特点及他们的感受。

1.七八年级我们已经学过Where did you go on vacation? What are you doing for vacation? Have you ever been to amusement park?来谈论假日的活动，对这种接近生活的话题有较大的兴趣，新的表达方式也不难，加上操练，应该很容易掌握。

2.本单元有个重难点即定语从句，在unit6的作业中体现出学生对关系代词的掌握还是不好，如果在本单元接着讲关系副词，容易混淆，需要更细致地教学。。

学习目标 1、知识目标：重点词汇--educational, fascinating, thrilling, peaceful, jungle等；

重点句型---Where would you like to visit?

---I'd like /love/ I hope to visit...

2、能力目标：使学生能够用目标语言谈论想参观的地方；能够用不同形容词描绘假期；使学生掌握听力技巧。

Maybe some words can not be read out correctly

Leading to read is useful to master the words.

1）Qs：where did you go this summer vacation?what do you think of the **?do you like it?”

2)Make Ss read the new words by themselves in 2 minutes;

Correct the wrong place;

Ss descdibe the place in the picture using the new adj.

Ss lead to read the words appeared just now 认真完成老师布置的预习作业，在上课前摆好课本、练习本，并安静。

And in 3),it is a little difficult to guess the vacations and change the simple sentences to Complex Sentence 1)1a, Q:what do you think of the vacations in 1a?

Read adj.together twice.

Guess where sam/gina would like to visit?

Let's listen,check where they would like to go and why?

Check the answers.

2)2a,Q:where would you like to visit this winter vacation?why?

Listen,some friends are talking about their plans, number them in the order,then check the answers.

3)2b,listen again,why do they decide not to visit these places? check

show pictures and guess my friends’vacation plan.(Garfield,Ba Jie,Backkom,dore emeng) 认真听课，积极进行课堂学习活动。并有自已独立的见解。

Practice the new sentence patterns Pairwork: show pictures on places in the worlds and work in paris,practice,then act it out 积极参加小组活动，爱动手、动口、动脑能力强，与同学合作愉快。

Read aloud Read Grammar focus Preview section A 3a 按时保质保量独立完成。

课后反思本节课较为成功之处有以下几点：

1.以学生为中心，通过活动让学生进行口头表达；

2.创新，同时追求学以致用。所以关注细节，使教学步步推进，自然流畅；

3.用提问的方式引导学生循序渐进,顺利进入话题.

新目标九年级英语课件(篇11)

一、不同引导词引导的宾语从句（88教案网 jab88.Com）

（一）、由从属连词that引导的宾语从句。

注：陈述句用that引导。 that只有语法作用，没有实在的意义，在口语和非正式文体中可以省略。例如：

·She says, “I am from Shuanggu ”。

She says that she is from Shuanggu .

2. She says, “She can’t sleep well ”。

She says that she can’t sleep well

e.g.

1. I hear (that) _______________________. （一小时后他会回来）

2. He said (that) ______________________. （他非常想念我们）

3. The teacher told us (that)_________________.（地球围着太阳转）

（二）、由从属连词whether, if 引导的宾语从句。If和whether在句中的意思是“是否”。例如：

·He wants to know, “Is Tan Dun a world

famous composer?” （改为宾语从句）

He wants to know ifwhether Tan Dun is a world-famouscomposer.

2.“HasTan built a bridge between the East and the West?” he asks. （改为宾语从句）

He asks ifwhether Tan has built a bridge between theEast and the West.

e.g.

1. I want to know ___________________.（他是否跟我们一起去公园）

2. Ask him _____________________. （他是否能来）

3. I don’t know ___________________________.（是否要下雨）

（注意：当句末为or not时，引导词只能用whether而不能用if.）

（三）、注意：以下情况只用whether，不用if。

I don’t know _____ he will come or not.

2.I don’t care of ______ heis taller than the other players.

3.He wondered ______ to remain there foranother week.

4. ______ this is true or not, I’m not sure.

小结：

1.whether引导的从句常可以与连词or或or not直接连用。

2. whether及其引导的成分可放于介词之后，作介词的宾语。

3. whether可以引导带to的不定式。

4. 当宾语从句提到句首时，只能用whether引导。

二、中考链接

1. The young man asked it's summer or winter.

A. either B. that C. if D. whether

2. We don't know they did it .

A. whether B. who C. what D. which

3.Does anybody know Tan Dun is famous for “WATER” or not .

A. if B. where C. whether D. that

5.if和when既能引导条件状语从句，又能引导宾语从句。因此，遇到它们就要认真分析一下。

1.I want to know if he _______ (come) tomorrow.

If he _______(come). Please tell me.

2.Can you tell me whenhe________ (appear) ?

Please call me when he _______ (appear).

三、由连接代词what, whom, whose, which, what及连接副词 when,where, how, why引导的宾语从句

例如：

n Do you know who (whom) they are waiting for?

n He asked whose handwriting was the best.

n Can you tell me where the No.3 bus stop is?

n I don’t know why the train is late.

eg:

1.He asked __________________________. (谁能回答这个问题）

2.Do you know_________________________. （他们在等谁）

3. Can you tell me .(他在哪儿）

4. Could you tell me ______________________ .（我该怎么去车站）

5. Would you tell me ______________ .（为什么火车迟到了）

二、时态归纳：

1、当主句的谓语动词是一般现在时或一般将来时，宾语从句的谓语动词可以用所需要的任何一种时态。eg

Jim_______ ( be ) a worker two years ago.

Jim ( be ) an English teacher now.

Jim ( cook ) dinner tomorrow .

Jim ( sing )a popular songnow.

Jim ( be ) to the Great Walltwice . J

2、当主句的谓语动词是一般过去时，宾语从句的谓语动词要用相应的过去时态，但当宾语从句叙述的内容为客观真理时，仍然用一般现在时。e.g.

He will go to Hong Kong.

2) He is sick.

3) He is reading a book .

4) He has finished his work.

1) He_________ to Hong Kong.

2) He_____ sick.

3) He ___________ a book .

4) He____________

Exercise：

将下面的句子连接成为含有宾语从句的复合句。

1)These flowers are from Guangdong. He said.

He said ____ these flowers _______ from Guangdong.

2)Light travels faster than sound. My teacher told me.

My teacher told me _____ light _______ faster thansound.

3)Are the children playing games? Tell me.

Tell me ______ the children ______ ______ games.

4)Have you finished your homework yet? Mr. Zhao asked MaChao

Mr. Zhao asked Ma Chao _______ _______ ______ _____ _____homework yet. 三、宾语从句的语序

宾语从句的语序应为陈述句的语序。例如：1. “I am having an English lesson.” He said to me .

He told me that he was having an English lesson.

2. “I will play basketball .” Spud said.

Spud said that he would play basketball

一随主，二随宾，三不变

n I think (that) you will like this school soon.

n Can you tell me how I can get to the zoo?

n Please tell me when we’ll have the meeting

yjs21.cOm更多幼师资料编辑推荐

新目标九年级英语课件模板9篇

每个老师在上课前会带上自己教案课件，因此教案课件不是随便写写就可以的。教案是学科教育发展的重要驱动力，如何写优质课的教案？今天推荐一篇网络文章介绍的是“新目标九年级英语课件”的相关内容，轻松阅读愉快分享把这篇文章分享给您的朋友吧！

新目标九年级英语课件篇1

白城市首届教师技能大赛教学设计

《英语（新目标）》九年级

Unit 9 When was it invented?

Section A — 1

白城市第十三中学刘吉华

一、教学分析：

1、知识背景：本册书的第三单元已出现了被动语态，学生已掌握被动语态的基本构成。

2、教材分析：本课为本单元的起始课，主要围绕the history of inventions 这一话题进行课堂教学和语言实践。主要涉及的语法项目是被动语态的过去时和一般现在时。要求学生紧密联系史实和生活实际，谈论发明的时间、发明者和发明的用途。提高学生对被动语态的运用能力。

3、学情分析：学生基础知识掌握较好，但不太擅长口语表达。部分学生基础差，接受能力弱。

4、重点及突出方法：被动语态的用法：动态呈现被动语态的变化过程，设立情景与任务，模仿操练，掌握要点。

5、难点及突破方法：培养学生综合语言运用能力，发挥多媒体课件形象性的优势，发挥教师良好的示范作用，注重教师在课堂中对学生无意识的影响。

二、教学目标：

1、语言知识目标：掌握被动语态的用法，通过使用When was the …

invented? Who was the … invented by? What was the …used for? 来谈论发明的历史和发明的用途。

2、语言技能目标：能在听的过程中记录要求获得的信息；能有效地询问信息，能与他人沟通信息，合作完成任务；能自如运用所学谈论发明，提高实际语言运用能力。

3、情感态度目标：培养学生良好的合作意识，鼓励学生探究实践，激发学生为祖国的强盛而努力学习的爱国热忱。

三、设计理念：通过学生收集资料、调查报告等活动，实现资源共享，注重跨学科知识渗透，合作学习，共同发展、全面发展。采用现代化教学手段，采用“任务型”教学途径，提高学生的学习兴趣，多角度训练学生口语表达能力，提高语言运用能力。

四、课前准备：

1、发《发明表》，让学生查资料，尽可能多地填写发明家和发明时间。

2、多媒体课件。

五、教学过程：

1、导入新课：由蔡伦发明造纸术引出被动句：… was invented …

2、实践训练： 1）、让学生猜测发明的先后顺序，熟悉练习… was invented before/after… 2）、播放1b，听听力，使学生感知句型及其应用。3）、竞赛：提出问题When was the … invented?让学生比赛谁的记忆力好，在比赛中强化训练学生对发明时间的问答。4）、呈现句式：划线提问，从而解决Who was the … invented by?中要有

by这一学生理解的难点。5）、提出问题：Who invented the inventions? 练习熟悉Who was the …

invented by? It was invented by …

3、联系实际，展开讨论： 1）、介绍日常生活中的几种物品的用途，呈现句式… be used for… 2）、引导学生谈论日常生活中的发明的实际用途。

4、能力提高：

设计任务：了解更多的发明。

设计任务：小组活动，介绍一种发明。

5、总结：

学生总结，老师总结。

6、评价与拓展：

学生做幻灯片中的习题。拓展思路，提高实践能力。

7、作业：

完成短文“The most...invention”

六、板书设计：

Unit 9

-When was it invented?-It was invented in …-Who was it invented by?-It was invented by …-What is it used for …?-It is used for …

七、反思：

新目标九年级英语课件篇2

新目标九年级英语第八单元说课稿

Unit 8 I’ll help clean up the city parks

(section B)

田涓

一、教学理念

《英语课程标准》(实验稿)明确提出了基础教育阶段的总体教学目标是“以学生语言技能、语言知识、情感态度、学习策略和文化意识的发展为基础，培养学生综合运用英语语言的能力”。新教材也处处体现了以学生为主体的教学理念和任务型教学模式。新的教学理念根据学习的内容，设计各种交际任务活动，让学生在完成活动任务的过程中习得语言，从而激发学生学习英语的兴趣和积极性，培养学生用英语表达思想和交际的能力；同时增强学生参与意识、竞争意识和团队精神，从而为学生创造一个积极而愉悦的教学氛围，使学生真正成为学习的主人，真正做到学在其中，乐在其中，为学生的终身学习打下坚实的基础。

二、教材分析

1、教材的地位及作用

这套教材采用任务型语言教学(Task-based Language

Teaching)模式。教材中每单元都设计一个或几个与该单元话题有关的任务，让学生在完成任务的过程中，使用英语获取信息，用英语进行交流，培养运用英语解决实际问题的能力。

本单元是初中英语新教材九年级第八单元，本单元的核心话题为“volunteering”，围绕着主动提供帮助，以观察图片、听力理解、阅读理解等训练方式和独立学习、合作交流、完成任务等形式完成目标语言的输入，学习

“I will „”，“I would

like„”等句型和一些重要动词短语为主要学习内容，并且设置任务型综合性语言实践活动，让学生在交际活动中，学会如何正确地用英语表达自己的意见和建议，重在培养学生的习得语言运用能力、实践能力、合作能力及创新意识。

2、教学目标

（1）知识与能力

1）重点词汇：

●put off, hand out, call up, give away, run out of, clean up，set up, take after, fix up, cheer up, give out, hunger, sign, repair

重点句型：

● I ’d like to work outside.● I”ll help clean up the city park.● You could give out food at a food bank.2）、依托本单元的语言素材提高学生听、说、读、写及自学、创新和沟通能力。熟练掌握“I will „”，“I would

like„”等句型，培养学生运用语言的能力。

3）、培养学生善于听说、乐于听说的良好习惯和学习能力。

4）、在表演和讨论中培养学生乐于表达的人际交往能力和知识创新能力。

（2）过程与方法

1）通过短文阅读，进一步提高学生阅读能力；

2）通过复述吉米的故事，提高学生的口语表达能力；

3）通过采访及小组合作等方式，进一步提高学生的语言综合运用能力。

（3）情感态度及价值观

1）、深刻理解志愿者工作是伟大的；

2）、帮助他人让你我他更开心，让世界更美好；

3）、志愿者工作是一种社会文化，是世界范围的热点话题。

3.Pair work

重点：“I will „”，“I would like„”句型及部分重要动词短语。

难点：做什么样的志愿者工作及如何去做？

确立重点与难点的依据：根据教学大纲的要求，及本单元在教材中所处的地位和作用。

三、学情分析

学情剖析：初三学生正处于感性向理性的转型期，求知欲和表现参与意识很强，有一定的逻辑分析能力，同时也需要教师的积极引导。

本单元的主题是开展有关志愿者活动，是学生很感兴趣的话题。学生可以采用Teamwork和Role

playing的学习策略，学习新词汇，掌握重点句型和主要内容，同时能比较好地解决类似问题（志愿者活动、制定活动计划），既能运用所学知识，联系实际生活，又能提高解决问题以及综合运用语言能力。

四、教法、学法设计

为达成上述教学目标，根据Go for

it!教材的特点，我们将运用任务型教学途径，而学生也相应地采取自主、合作、探究的学习方式。本单元采用Teamwork、Interview、Telling

stories、Discussion和Role playing的学习策略，掌握重要短语和句型，提高听说读的能力。

1、教法设计

教学内容的核心要求符合科学规律、认识规律，因此我在教学过程中，正确把握教育教学的特点，倡导自主、合作、探究的学习方式，激发兴趣，调动思维，培养创新能力。通过层层任务导入，精讲巧练，由浅入深，由易到难，由已知到未知，循序渐进地深化教学内容。展开以教师为主导，以学生为主体的师生双边活动。采用视听法、角色扮演、情景交际法和小组互助型学习法，并把竞争机制引入课堂。

(1)视听法，主要通过老师提问、学生回答等方式提供让学生听、说的练习机会；

（2）角色扮演和情景交际法，让学生利用听力和课文内容进行交流，让学生进行采访式、讲故事形式在做中学，在实践中获得信息，习得英语。

（3）小组互助型学习法，小组合作解决志愿者活动中做什么、如何去做等问题。

对教材的处理上本着，以“旧”启“新”，以“练”促“学”，以“熟”生“巧”的原则，通过听说、朗读、对话、句子接龙和小组表演，提高口语表达能力，且英语口语表演能够活跃课堂气氛，使学生愉快学习，真正做学习的主人。

2、学法设计

本单元主要的任务就是要让学生学会运用习得语言知识结合自己谈论有关志愿者活动，在任务型活动中学习并巩固本单元的内容。因此在教学中，教师主要是让学生学会：

1）、课前预习，尝试自学；

2）、培养学生大胆发言、积极思维、合作能力；

3）、课堂认真听讲，养成好习惯，提高学习效率；

4）、复习巩固，拓展新知。

五、教学过程：

（一）、导入

1、让学生回忆八年级下册所学的北京大学毕业生志愿支边支教活动内容；

2、作学生曾做或想做的志愿者活动现场调查。

（二）、任务型听力

1、给出一组图片，让学生描述志愿者活动，了解他人的志愿者活动，同时复习前部分所学短语。（图片展示由普通人、名人事迹过渡到本课主要内容自行车男孩志愿者的故事）；

2、听力任务的热身：学习动词短语（要求学生读准发音，释义并造句），通过这种方式活用短语从而代替死记硬背，提高学生学习兴趣，也为下面听力和阅读作铺垫；

3、听：听中找重点短语，理解故事情节。听后两人一组进行模拟记者与志愿者采访活动。通过情景教学和角色扮演让学生置身其中，充分体验志愿者活动并提高了学生的语言技能。

（三）、任务型阅读（听后留一悬念，志愿者活动中遇到困难怎么办？）

1、学生找出文章的重要短语；

2、学生找出志愿者男孩做志愿者工作中解决问题的方法的句子；

3、读后串联听力与阅读内容，讲述小男孩的故事，训练口语的同时熟练掌握教材重点难点内容---怎样去做志愿者工作。

（四）、任务型讨论（小组互助性学习，激活学生思维）

创设情景，放手给学生想、做、说的机会。我设计有两项小组任务型讨论，全班分成四小组，每组任选其一：

1、以2008年奥运会为主题，围绕志愿者活动，展开讨论做什么、如何做及为什么做；

2、列举国际上几个主要的志愿者组织，如绿色和平、联合国儿童基金会、世界野生动物基金会等，讨论怎样参加国际组织志愿者活动；

教师巡回并做指导，组成员都积极思考并提出解决办法，同时每组代表也可去访问在座老师们的看法，组长记录并在班上做汇报。最后按语言丰富准确、表述清晰程度、方式方法得当，评出最佳小组，通过这种方式可让学生有很强的集体荣誉感。这样设计的目的是：

（1）、先让学生自行讨论可以避免受教师的想法所局限没有自己的见解。

（2）、采访老师既可以让学生能够用英语去实际交流，达到学以致用。也可以让学生从英语教师那里获得更多信息和掌握更多的英语表达方式，由于这样的学习方式平时机会不多，因此会让学生感到很新鲜很有趣味性，在与老师交流时也会让学生产生成就感。

（3）、我认为学生合作精神的培养尤为重要，学生通过这一环节既能够有自主学习的机会，又锻炼了与他人的合作，并在探索中有其个性思维发散的空间。

（4）、当学生探讨后，以此为内容写一篇作文。我布置这项作业的依据是新课标的要求。新课标指出：写作需有明确的动机和积极的态度，写作的题目应结合学生的实际需要，使他们具有写作的愿望，这样他们才能写作，才能发挥自己的思维能力，而不是为了应付教师而做的作业。

六、板书

Offer help: I’d like to …

I will …

I want to …

You could …

Being a volunteer work you could do and then make a conversation.。is great!

The story of “Bike boy”:

how to help others(listening)—problem

How to solve the problems

(reading)—solution.Phrasal verbs:

put off, hand out, call up, give

away，run out of, clean up, set up, take after，fix up, cheer up, give out, sign, repair

新目标九年级英语课件篇3

新目标九年级英语

Unit 2 I used to be afraid of the dark.教学设计

河北省武安市第九中学王肖敏

一．教材分析

1.教材的地位和作用

本单元是初中英语新教材第三册第2单元，本单元的核心话题为“talk about what they used to be like”，围绕着谈论过去自己和他人过去经常做的事，谈论自己和他人过去的外貌性格爱好，以观察图片、听力理解、阅读理解等训练方式和独立学习、合作交流、完成任务等形式完成目标语言的输入，学习句型Used to 为主要学习任务，并且设置任务型综合性语言实践活动，让学生在交际活动中，学会如何正确地用英语表达自己的意见和建议，重在培养学生的习得语言运用能力、实践能力、合作能力及创新意识。

2.教学目标

(1)语言目标：谈论自己和他人过去是什么模样。

(2)知识目标

重点词汇Used to和描述人的外貌和性格的形容词。

重点句型Mario used to be short, but now he is tall.She used to be shy, but now he is outgoing.I used to have shot hair, but now I have long hair.(3)能力目标：

1）依托本单元的语言素材提高学生听、说、读、写及自学、创新和沟通能力。熟练掌握“used to” 句型，培养学生运用语言的能力。

2）培养学生善于听说、乐于听说的良好习惯和学习能力。

3）运用CAI或图片，充分调动学生的感官，培养观察力和注意力。

4）在表演中培养学生乐于表达的人际交往能力和知识创新能力。

(4）情感目标：

人是发展变化的,矮的同学长高了,胖的同学变瘦了,兴趣爱好也会较以前有所不同,随着年龄的增长,同学们应不断克服自己的缺点,增长知识,健全自己的人格,日趋完善自己。

3．教学重点和难点：

重点：这一单元的重点在于“used to be 句型的用法”。

难点：掌握表示性格、外貌和爱好的句子表达。used to句型在日常生活中的运用。

二．教材处理：

根据以上对教材的分析，同时从所教班级学生实际出发，在教材处理上，将重点落在两个主要的环节上：一是人物外貌性格的描述和表达，二是used to do 的用法。同时每个环节又作了两次递进式的演练，这样可以相对降低学生的学习难度，同时也是贯彻顺序渐进的原则。从中巧妙地穿插图片帮助学生进行适当的归纳讲解，在此基础上最后进入游戏活动，让学生在玩中学，学中玩，以期达到本单元的教学目的。

三．教学方法：

本单元从一开始导入，就以任务型为驱动，坚持以教师为主导，学生为主体展开师生双边及学生之间多边的对话，并同时辅以由浅入深，层层推进，演绎归纳，听说并重的原则。采用视听法、问答法，和情景交际法，并把竞争机制引入课堂。

（1）视听法，主要通过多媒体课件展示、图片展示、老师提问、学生回答等方式提供让学生看、听、说、的练习机会。

（2）问答法和情景交际法，用多媒体展示各种图片，让学生利用这些图片进行交流，让学生在做中学，在实践中获得信息，习得英语。

学生通过谈论自己或别人过去和现在的不同之处，来练习used to be 句型。利用图画创设情境的形式来练习这个句型。例如：利用悬念法、引申法设置谢霆锋小时候的照片和现在的照片来对比，让学生对他们比较感兴趣的明星进行外貌和爱好上的描述，学生会非常的积极，以达到教学目的。

四．教学手段：

本课时以多媒体为主要教学辅助手段。

五．教学程序：

Step 1 Revision

Talk about the students themselves what they used to be like two years

ago.What did she / he look like two years ago ?

He used to be short./ thin / straight hair / funny./ heavy…

Step 2 Lead in and Activity 1a

some pictures about some stars，ask students to say their appearance and personality.Students are very glad.Review the words about appearance and personality.T: Who is she/ he?

S: She/ He is…

T: She/ He used to be short, didn’t she/ he?

S: Yes.She used to be thin.She used to have short hair.2.Fill in the chart below with words to describe people. two pictures about a girl.Then ask the students: “What did she use to be?” Let students say their opinions freely, “She used to be ……, but now she is ……” Lead in “used to be”. two pictures about Xie Tingfeng.Guess, “Who is he?” Lead in “He was short when he was a child, but he is tall now.” The students say, “He used to be short, but now he is tall.” Change the hobby about Xie Tingfeng.“He ”

Step 3 Activity 1b

1.Play the tape.The Ss listen and fill in the blanks.What did his friends use to look like?

2.Listen again and check up the answers.Step 4 Work in pairs, ask and answer

1.Look at the pictures and make sentences.2.Pair works

A: What did you use to look like?

B: I used to be fat, but now I’m thin.What about you?

A: I used to… but now I’m …

3.Report

I used to be heavy, but now I’m thin.My friend …used to…, but now he/sheis …

Step 5 Grammar

used to do sth过去常常做某事，而现在已不做。只有一种形式,即过去式,可用于所有人称。

1.肯定句He used to get up early.The river used to be clean.2.否定句, 常用didn’t use to或used not to

He didn’t use to smoke.He used not to smoke.3.疑问句，常用Did …use to…?

Did he use to smoke?

4.反意疑问句

(1)She used to work there,(2)You didn’t use to be tall, Step 6 Play Games----Lucky 52

The students choose a number from 1 to 9 and look at the picture to

answer the question.If the students answer the question correctly, he will get a prize.Step 7 Exercise

Ask the students to do some exercise.Step 8 Homework

Write an article about you, including the changes about the appearance and personality.

新目标九年级英语课件篇4



新目标英语九年级上册

Unit1 How do you study for a test?

SectionA(1a-2c)Shangma Primary School Zhao Xiaoyan 教案设计

一、Teaching aims:(教学目标)Language goal（知识目标）：

掌握以下词汇：flashcard，vocabulary,aloud,pronunciation Talk about how to study English Ability goal（能力目标）：

学习使用“How do you study …? ”及其答语“I study by …” 句型

Emotion goal（情感目标）：

Talk about the ways of studying English;(谈论学好英语的方法)Give them the confidence to learn and enjoy English.（帮他们树立学好英语的信心）

二．Teaching importance and difficulties（教学重难点）how 副词，“怎样，如何”,对于方式，手段等的提问；

by 介词，“用……的方式”, “以……的方法”,后跟名词或动词的-ing形式

How do you study for a test /learn English? I study/learn by listening to tapes/ by working with friends…/by studying with a group...三．Teaching steps（教学步骤）

Step 1 Lead-in with a free talk(自由对话导入新课)（2分钟）

Greeting with the students;Hello,everyone1Welcome back to school.I’m very happy to see you again.Most of you got good grades last term ,congratulations!Of course,don’t lose your heart if you didn’t get good grades.OK , Today ,let‟s talk about how to study for a test and how to learn English well.（展示课题）

Step 2 Pre-task（3分钟）

T:Learning to learn is very important.And learning to pass a test is also important.You know we can study by many different ways.Now Let’s ask you how to study for a test.T:How do you study for a test,Lili? S:read the textbook.T:Oh,you study by reading the textbook.让学生给出不同的回答，强调语言结构verb+by/with gerund.,教师不断强化句型，让学生有个模式进行训练。

Step 3 While-task（38分钟）

1.Task1 1a checking the ways you study

Ask a student to read the ways.T:Check the ways you study for an English test and add other ways you sometimes use.Then ask questions to check their answers.2 Task 2 1b Listen carefully for the tape（仔细听力练习）First let the students look at the picture,and say how do they study.: By making flashcard, by listening to tapes, by asking the teacher for help Then listen to the tape, write the letters from the picture above.Next check the ansers:(1)Mei studies by making flashcards, so the answer is „„a”.(2)Pierre（皮埃尔）studies by asking the teacher for help, so the answer is „„c”(3)Antonio（安东尼奥）studies by listening to the tape, so the answer is „„b”.Task3 Pairwork

Talk about the ways of stuying with your partner? A:How do you study for a test?

B:I study by working with a group.4Task4 2a Listen to the tape, check the questions you hear Ask the students to read through the questions.Then ask them to listen to the tape careful.Check the answers.2a Listen again and match the answers.Ask them to read the answers,then match the answers with the qustions above.Finally,check the answers.5Task5 2c Pairwork

Make conversations using the information from 2a and 2b.A； Have you ever studied with a group? B：Yes ,I have.I‟ve learned a lot that way./ No ,I haven‟t.Step4 Homework（1分钟）

1,Finish Self-check.2,write down the ways of learning you know.Step5 Ending words.（总结下课）（1分钟）

Well ,that‟s all our today‟s lesson.I had a great time with you..See you later.板书

Unit 1 How do you study for a test? How do you study for a test? I study by reading textbook.by making vocabulary lists.by asking the teacher for help.by listening to the teachers.read aloud

speaking skills How/What about doing sth.? too… to…

新目标九年级英语课件篇5

maybe也许 countryside乡村 camera照相机 film胶卷

drink饮料 bring带来 weatherman 天气预报员 cut割；切

degree度数 stop阻止 pack打包/行李 snowman雪人

nothing much没什么 look forward to盼望 go climbing去爬山

It doesn’t matter.没关系 best wishes最真挚的祝愿

in the world全世界 That’s a pity!真糟糕/遗憾！

go sightseeing去游览 have a picnic去野餐

1) Listen! Tomorrow’s weather report is on the radio.

听！收音机里正在播放天气预报。

2) I hope you won’t forget us. 我希望你不要忘记我们。

3) The snowmen will slowly becomes water when it gets warm.

当天气变暖时，雪人会慢慢变成水。

4) I will send you a postcard. 我会给你寄一张明信片。

5) I’m waiting for your answer. Please write to me soon.

我在等你的来信。请尽快给我写信。

6) Thanks for inviting me. I’d love to go with you.

谢谢你的邀请。我很乐意和你去。

新目标九年级英语课件篇6

新目标英语九年级Unit 8第一课时说课稿

今天我说课的题目是初中英语人教版九年级Unit8 I’ll help clean up the city parks.本课的中心话题是提供帮助。引导学生关注社会,利用自己的特长为他人社会做事情。整个说课我将分成四个大部分进行讲述：即教材分析、教法分析、学法指导、教学过程。

一、教材分析

（一）教材的地位和作用

本单元的中心话题是提供帮助，整个单元的内容是围绕提供帮助，以及志愿活动展开生动、活泼的对话，和阅读。而且这些志愿活动与我们的生活密切相关，通过本课的学习，要求学生能够谈论自己帮助别人的方式，学会关心社会，关心他人。从而关注身边的生活环境，从小事做起。引导学生体会志愿活动，投身于社会公益事业。

（二）教学目标

根据《英语课程标准》关于总目标的具体描述，结合第八单元的教材内容，将本单元的教学目标细化：

Knowledge and Ability objects(知识与能力目标):（1）重点词语：重点掌握如下描绘性的形容词 clean up hunger homeless cheer up give out（2）重点句型：I'd like to work outside． You could give out food at a food bank（3）培养学生能够运用所学的语言目标进行简单的语言训练的能力.(4)能够听懂磁带上的每句话.Course and Methods(过程与方法)：可采取小组讨论的方法进行知识与技能的训练,调动已有的知识、根据情景推测句子的含义。Moral object(情感态度与价值观目标)：通过对本单元的学习，增强爱心，同情心，以及社会责任感。

Teaching Key Points and Difficulties(教学重、难点)

1、Key point：一般将来时的应用.2、Difficult point：一些动词短语的用法.Teaching Methods(教学方法)：Watching and describing methods listening method Pairwork Teaching Aids(教具)：Tape pictures small blackboard

二、教法分析

1．教学设计思路与教材处理：

《新目标英语》中的具体语言目标是通过各种各样的Tasks来实现的；学生需要运用具体而特定的行动来完成一定的交际任务。整个教学过程中，各种语言结构与语言功能与不同的学习任务有机的结合。任务活动所谋求的效果不是一种机械的语言训练，而是侧重在执行任务中学生自我完成任务的能力和策略的培养；重视形式在完成任务过程中的参与和在交流活动中所获得的经验。因此本节课我将始终引导学生通过完成具体的任务活动来学习语言，让学生为了特定的学习目的去实施特定的语言行动，通过完成特定的交际任务来获得和积累相应的学习经验，让学生在用中学，在学中用（Learning by using, learning for using）。2．教学手段

多媒体辅助：用flash 软件将本课所需要的动画、录音、图片、文字、图表和音乐制成CAI软件，使抽象的语言变得直观，为学生运用英语进行交际创设情景，实现师生互动，生生互动和人机互动的多向交流。

三、学法指导

新制定的《英语课程标准》把“培养学生学习英语的兴趣，树立自信心，培养良好学习习惯和形成有效策略，发展自主学习和合作精神”放在了首位。依据课改的精神，我从以下几个方面对学生进行学法指导。

1、学习方法的指导

培养学生观察力，想象力，记忆力以及思维能力。用生动的课件调动学生的感官进行听说读写的训练。

2、学习积极性的调动

我在教学过程中创造一种开放的，和谐的，积极互动的语言氛围，把课堂变成有声有色的舞台，让学生在乐中学。

3、学习能力的培养

通过连贯的听说读写，游戏，竞赛等，培养学生的交际能力，发展他们的思维能力。

4、学习策略的指导

本节课将在课堂活动中把学生分成四人小组的学习小组，让他们围绕着课堂任务分工合作，在活动中相互探讨、相互交流、相互合作，从而获得知识、技能和情感体验，发展他们的能力。创建开放式，探究式的课堂，有意识渗透学习策略的训练。我让学生观察课件画面，回答问题，让学生学会使用认知策略；让学生表演对话，实现交际策略；引导学生交际，主动练习和实践，是调控策略的体现。充分利用多媒体，录音，卡片等是资源策略。

四、教学过程

Step1.Discuss and write(导入新课)

1.Ask questions: 1)Have you ever helped others? 2)How do you feel about helping others?

3)Can you tell us your experience of helping others? Ask the students to discuss in small groups

Step2.Guessing games（猜游戏--新单词）

Show some pictures with the new verb phrases, let the student guess the meanings of the phrases in small groups.Divide the whole class into six groups, have a competition.Step 3.Brain storm（头脑风暴自主学习）

Ask the students to look at the bulletin board and then list other ways they could help people.Step4.1b.Listen and complete the sentences(听的技能）

Ask the student just listen for the first time, then write for the second time.Check the answers.Then ask students to read the four conversations with their partners

Step 5.Summary(梳理归纳）

clean up.cheer up.give out.Use the game to practice the phrases.Step6.1c.Pairwork（英语交际能力）

Call their attention to the example in the speech bubbles in 1a,ask them to make up similar the conversations to class.Step7.Homework

Tell the students to do the homework：

1.Make up one sentence with each of the following phrasal verbs:

clean up.cheer up.give out.2.Practice conversations with partners after class

五、板书设计

Unit 8 I’ll hel p clean up the city parks.The Period 1 Phrasal verb:

1.clean up—make a place clean and tidy, put things in order We should always clean up the dirty parts of the sea.2.cheer up—make someone feel happy The good news cheers everyone up.3.set up —We are going to set up a food

新目标九年级英语课件篇7

1．aloud adv．出声地(使别人能听得到)朗读是学英语的一个好方法。

▲loud adj.大声的，声音洪亮的，loud—louder—loudest 他说话声音很大以便于每个人都能听得到他。▲adv.loud—louder—loudest don’t talk so loud．the kids are reading．说话小声些，孩子们正在看书。(speak)louder，please!请再说高一些!▲loudly adv吵吵闹闹地，噪声地我听到有人在使劲敲门。

they are talking loudly in the next room．他们在隔壁说话声很大。她声音很甜美。

她提高了嗓音队便于别人能听清楚。因为咳嗽，他失声了。▲noise n噪音，吵闹别弄出那么大的噪音。

i heard a strange noise outside．我听到外边奇怪的声音。

▲sound n．(自然界中的)声音，响声声音的传播比光慢。

3．memory n．(计算机的)储存器

a lot of information is stored in the memory．计算机的储存器能储存很多信息。▲n．记忆力

车祸后他的记忆力很差了。▲n.回忆，怀念

我对童年有美好的回忆。

▲memorize／memorise vt.记住，背过他能很快记住很多单词。

4.frustrate vt．使失望，使沮丧他上大学的梦想遭受挫折。

▲frustrating adj.令人失望的他所说的话很令人失望。

她觉得看英语电影很令人失望(因为看不懂)。▲frustrated adj.失望的，沮丧的当他再次考试没及格后，他很失望。5．add vt.增加，加

she tasted the soup and added more salt．她尝了尝汤，又加了些盐。▲add to 增添

他的到来给我们添了很多麻烦。

▲add up to 总计达„„，加起来„„ 我们班上学生的数目加起来是55人。▲vt.补充说，又说

他和我们说了再见，又说他会再来看我们的。我们队赢了的消息令所有的人很激动。那场足球赛很令人激动。

当听到那个消息，我们很激动。

7．speak(speak—spoke—spoken)说(语言)，讲话你会说法语吗? 你知道谁要在会上发言? 当我给他打电话时，他正在和他的朋友谈话。你们在说什么? ▲say 说(后接说的内容)他在会上说了什么? 她说下周回来。▲tell 告诉

tell sb sth 告诉某人某事(接双宾语)是谁告诉你的那个消息? ▲讲，说

tell stories讲故事，tell a lie撒谎，tell the truth说实话我小的时候，奶奶经常给我讲故事。

don’t believe him!he is telling a tie．别信他!他在撒谎。

老实说，我不太同意你的意见。▲adj.巧完整的，完全的你会造完整的句子吗? 他对我来说完全是陌生的。

那时我们之间的秘密，所以不要告诉别人。▲adj.秘密的

咱们不让别人知道此事。泄露秘密。

10．impress vt．使感动，给„„深刻印象他的事迹给在场的人留下了深刻的印象。那个国家的美景打动了我们所有的人。、、▲impressed adj.(被)感动的我们被他的话所感动。

11.native n.当地人，本国人

我们在巴西度假时，就像当地人那样生活。the kangaroo is a native of australia．袋鼠是产于澳洲的动物。

▲native speaker 生来就说某种语言的人

他的英语说得太好了，我们都认为他是个本地人。▲native language 母语

马克思出生在德国，法语是他的母语。important phrases(重点词组)2．first of all 首先

5．spoken english 英语口语 8．1ater on 以后；随后

10．native speakers 生来就说某种语言的人 11．not at ail 根本不；一点也不 12．end up 结束

14．make up 组成；编造

15．enjoy doing sth 喜欢做某事 16．take notes 做笔记 17．make mistakes 犯错误 19．read aloud 朗读

20.have trouble(in)doing sth 做某事有困难你怎样准备考试? ▲study for a test prepare for a test 准备考试一昨天晚上我打电话时你在干什么? 一我在准备数学测验。我听录音准备英语测验。

▲by 靠，用(方法，手段等)，后接动名词(doing„)he makes a living by repairing bikes．他靠修车为生。

▲listen vi．后加to再接名词。当我到家时，姐姐正在听音乐。听!有人在敲门。

他靠求助于老师来学习。

▲ask sb for help求助于某人

— 如果你有麻烦，你可以求助于我。一谢谢。我会的。

你曾经和朋友练习过会话吗? ▲ever adv.用于疑问句和否定旬中，“曾经” 你担心考试会不及格吗? 听录音怎么样? 今晚去看电影怎么样? 靠朗读来练习发音怎么样? read aloud 朗读

reading aloud is very helpful in leaning english．朗读在学英语中很有帮助。

▲a lot 代表一个不可数名词。例如：他虽然很小，但他知道很多。别那样和父母说话。

8．it improves my speaking skills．它能提高我的口语技巧。

▲improve vt.改进，改善，提高他的工作在慢慢改进。他的发音大大提高了。▲speaking skill 口语技巧 listening skill 听力技巧听懂不同的声音很困难。

▲too + adj.／adv.+ to do “太„„而不能„„”。又如：他太小，不能上学。她跑得太慢追不上我。

▲ask sb about sth 询问某人关于„„的情况

ask her about the pen that you lost．she may have found it．问问她你丢的钢笔，也许她捡到了。谁能告诉我记单词的最好办法是什么? 她说记流行歌曲的歌词也有点帮助。教英语是我的工作。

▲a little有点，代表不可数名词，其反义词为a lot。你的咖啡里想加糖吗? 一yes．just a little．好，要一点点。

12．he’s been learning english for six years and really loves it．他学英语有六年了，并且很喜欢它。

▲“has／have been doing sth”现在完成进行时，表示从过去某一时间开始持续到现在，还要进行下去的动作。又如：

she has been learning english for 5 years．她学英语有五年了。

he has been reading for 2 hours and hasn’t finished it yet．他看书有两个小时了，但还没有完成。

他发现看英语电影很令人失望，因为人们说话太快。i like playing basketball．我喜欢打篮球。

▲find sb／sth + n.／adj.／doing “发现某人„„”，后面的“n.／adj.／doing”作宾语补足语。又如：

我发现他是个勤奋的学生。我发现物理很难学。

当她到家时，她发现他躺在床上病了。她补充说和朋友练习会话一点帮助都没有。照看孩子们是她的工作。

▲not„at all 一点也不，用来加强语气，又如：我一点也不同意他的意见。

我们会因为某件事变得很激动，最后用汉语来描述。▲end up达到某种状态或采取某种行动，又如：

at first he said nothing but he ended up apologizing．一开始，他什么也不说，到头来还是道了歉。

我正在就关于学习英语作调查。我能问你几个问题吗? ▲do a survey about sth／doing sth 关于„„作调查上周，我们就网上冲浪作了个调查。

▲some用于疑问句时，表示希望得到肯定回答，如果只是询问信息，可以用any代替some用于疑问句和否定句中。又如：你能借给我些钱吗?(希望得到肯定回答)did you buy her any gifts? 你给她买礼物了吗?(询问信息)17．1 often keep an english notebook．我经常记英语笔记。

▲keep vt.记录(某事)，在某物上做书面记载她写日记有20多年了。

i have the habit of keeping notes．我有记笔记的习惯。

most of the students love reading．多数学生喜欢看书。

19．1 make mistakes in grammar．我在语法方面老犯错误。

▲make a mistake／make mistakes 犯错误当说英语时不要怕犯错误。by mistake 错误地．

你知道炸薯片是被错误发明的吗? 我不知道怎样使用逗号。我不知道该做什么。你能告诉我何时出发吗? 你为什么不加入一个英语俱乐郝来练习说英语昵? 当交通很拥堵时，你为什么不骑白行车上学呢? ▲join加入某组织成为其中的成员，take part in参加某种活动，attend参加会议，报告，演讲等。例如：

his father joined the party in 1976．他爸爸是1976年入的党。

工作之余人们经常参加体育活动。

i attended an important meeting yesterday．昨天我参加了一个会。我没有同伴一起练习英语。老师有话要说。

he has no room to live in．他没有房子住。

起初，对我来说听懂老师在班里讲话都不是件容易的事。▲first of all 最初，首先

first of all she just smiled，then she started to laugh．最初她只是笑，后来才放声大笑。对我来说学好物理很难。

it is important to learn english.学英语很重要。

一开始，她说得太快了，我不能听懂所有的话。他起初没钱，可是后来相当富有了。

▲not„every + 可数名词单数 = not all + 复数名词表示部分否定“并非所有的”又如：你没必要记住所有的字。不是所有的学生都住得离学校远。

后来，我意识到如果有些词听不懂没关系。▲later on 后来，以后

起初事情进展地很顺利，但后来他们遇到了麻烦。▲realize vt.意识到，认识到(有一个逐渐认识的过程)，不用于进行时和被动语态。例如：总有一天你会意识到你错了。

▲that引导的是realize的宾语从句，在宾语从句中又出现了if引导的条件状语从旬。例如：

如果你不会开车没关系。

我还害怕在班里发言，因为我怕同学会嘲笑我。

▲be afraid of sth／to do／of doing sth 害怕／不敢／恐怕做某事 i used to be afraid of the dark．我过去常常怕黑。

she’s afraid to go／of going out alone at night．她害怕夜晚独自出去。▲might 表示可能性

他可能知道她的电话号码，但我不确定。▲laugh at sb 嘲笑

it’s bad manners to laugh at people in trouble．嘲笑陷入困境的人不礼貌。

我认为做大量的听力练习是成为一名好的语言学习者的秘诀之一。他是喜欢足球的学生中的一员。

另一个我发现很困难的东西是英语语法。▲that引导的是定语从句，修饰another thing，that在定语从句中作found的宾语。又如：我能为你做点什么?(你买什么?)然后我用学过的语法造有独创性的句子。

▲start／begin to do sth = start／begin doing sth 开始做某事真是不可思议了，这样做很有帮助。

▲it's amazing + 从句／to do sth “„„真是太惊奇了”。在国外遇到老朋友，真是太惊喜了。

现在我很喜欢英语，并在这学期得了个“a”。▲注意：“a”前边用不定冠词，选用冠词时要看字母的发音，即元音音素开头的用“an”。例如：

在单词“hour”里面，有一个“u”和一个“r”。她造完整的句子有困难。

▲have trouble in doing sth 做某事有麻烦／困难 he had trouble in understanding native speakers．他听外国人说话有困难。

新目标九年级英语课件篇8

restaurant饭店 bank银行 another另一个 Queen皇后

market市场 dormitory宿舍 playground运动场 lucky幸运的

in the middle of在---的中间 police station警察局 next to在---的旁边

sports stadium运动场 in front of在---的前面 in the front row在前排

1) Excuse me. How can I get to the post office?

打扰了。怎样可以到邮局？

2) Can you tell me the way to the train station, please?

请问你能告诉我去火车站的路吗？

3) Is there a No.25 bus-stop near here? 这里附近有25路车的车站吗？

4) Walk along this street./ Go straight down this street.

沿着这条街一直走。

5) Go past the department store. 走过百货商店。

6) Turn left into Park Road. Take the second road on the right.

向左转入公园路。走右边的第二条路。

7) It’s five kilometers away. It’s a long way from here.

离这大约5公里。离这有一段很长的路。

8) It’s 100 metres along on the left. 沿这一直走，在左边大约100米处。

新目标九年级英语课件篇9

八年级英语教学设计

Unit2 I`ll help clean up the city parks

SectionA(3a-4)

一、教学目标

1、知识目标

（1）、掌握词汇及短语：spend…doing ,set up ,put…to good use ,not only…but also ,put off ,coach ,cheer up(2)、运用提供帮助的句型：You could help coach a football team

2、能力目标

（1）、运用目标语言，能比较流利地讲述自己能够做的事情。（2）、理解not only…but also 句型的用法。

3、情感目标

通过学习增强实际交际能力，培养学生为他人着想，热爱公益事业，乐于助人的优良品质。

二、教学重点

1、能够运用语言和语法知识进行阅读并理解文章意思。

2、学会如何提供帮助。

三、教学难点

理解句子Not only do I fell good about helping other people ,but I get to spend time doing what I love to do

四、教具：录音机

五、课堂教学设计

1、Duty report

2、Warm-up，学校打算开展志愿者活动，根据自己的兴趣爱好设计自己能够做的事情，激发学生的学习兴趣。

3、Lead-in,老师提问，T:There three special students in No.77 High School,do you want to know them?展示书上的图片，让学生提问，阅读理解短文，设法找出学生提出的问题的答案，当学生阅读时，教师列出重点词汇、句式，加深学生的印象，最后放录音，巩固课文内容。

4、教学操练3b、4 让学生小组讨论解决的方法，由两三组同学表演他们的对话，使他们能流利地用英语进行交流，引导学生关心和帮助他人。

5、Survey : 利用课文4的表格，询问同学的兴趣爱好以及根据自己的兴趣爱好可以做哪些帮助人们的事，培养学生在设计生活中运用本课所学内容，解决现实生活中问题的能力。

6、难点破解

（1）、not only…but also，用来连接两个并列的成分，also可以省略，连接并列主语时，谓语动词用就近原则，Not only the students but also the teacher is running.（2）、连接两个并列句，以not only开头的句子要倒装。（3）、否定式为neither …nor.7、小结

（1）、掌握本课生词及重点用法。（2）、能用所学内容给他人提供帮助。

8、布置作业

假设你们班打算去敬老院慰问，根据他们的爱好，为他们安排合适的事情。

教学反思

通过本节课的学习，学生能学习到一定的阅读策略，通过复述和写作环节学生的书面表达能力会有所提高。

九年级英语课件实用

常言道，优秀的人都是有自己的事先计划。在日常的学习工作中，幼儿园教师都会提前准备一些能用到的资料。资料意义广泛，可以指一些参考素材。资料对我们的学习工作发展有着重要的意义！你是否收藏了一些有用的幼师资料内容呢？小编经过整理，为你编辑了九年级英语课件实用，还请多多关注我们网站！

九年级英语课件篇1

主题：我的假期计划

暑假即将来临，我的假期计划已经整整一个月被我规划着。在我看来，假期是一段宝贵的时间，也是让我充电一下的机会。因此，我的假期计划充实而有意义。

首先，我打算将大部分时间用于学习和阅读。这个假期，我要完成初中学习的基础知识，为高中的学习打下坚实的基础。此外，读书是我一直以来非常喜欢的活动，假期里我计划要看一些精选书籍，用阅读来丰富自己的知识储备和生活阅历。

其次，我也希望假期中放松一下身心，拓宽视野。我计划去旅游，给自己带来新的视觉和感受。旅游可以使我体验到不同地区的文化、历史和美食，也可以让我接触到不同的人和事，为我未来的学习和生活奠定更加丰富多彩的基础。

另外，我也希望能够积极参与一些志愿者活动。照顾老人和孩子，帮助清洁环境等，这些都是令人愉悦的事情。以我微薄之力去为社会贡献一点点力量，也是共建美好社会的一种方式。

最后，我希望在假期的时光里，能够也多和家人和好友相处，分享每一刻的快乐和收获，增进彼此之间的感情和了解。

这个假期，我有多项计划，似乎时间有些紧迫。但是我相信，只要按照计划前进，即使路途漫漫，最终一切都会被我充实而未来充满希望。

九年级英语课件篇2

以《考试说明》为依据，以新课程标准为准绳，制订详细周密的复习计划，切实抓好初三英语复习工作。密切关注中考动态，联系学生实际，通过教材梳理，专项和综合训练，努力提高学生运用英语知识的能力和答题技巧，以适应新的中考形式和要求。

我校学生从初一入学时就能看出有很多学生都接处过英语，通过初中三年的学习有了一定的进步，也取得了一定的成绩，但是从试卷分析来看，我校九年级学生在阅读、写作和一些基础知识方面离中考和我们的要求还有一定的差距。

指导思想：通过不同题型的专项训练，熟悉各题型的命题特点，解题思路和方法夯实“常考点”，突破“失分点”，研讨“新考点”。

综合训练贯穿在初三英语教学的始终。该阶段重点培养学生应试能力，积累学生考试的经验。教师要细致分析各层次学生的知识和能力现状，对学生进行针对性的指导。教法上要帮助学生克服在解题中存在的主要问题，积累解题经验，以良好的心态确保该得到的分不丢失。要求教师根据各自班级常见的知识层面上的“失分点”，有针对性地制定 “个性化复习方案”，在梳理知识网络的过程中，突出易错、易混内容。薄弱环节，重点突破。教师分析近三年中考试卷，对中考趋势进行合理预测。

3 考前10天，再次细化复习迎考计划，精选精讲试题，帮助学生查漏补缺，指导学生复习迎考的方法，调整学生的生物钟，确保他们以最佳状态参加中考考试。

九年级英语课件篇3

Unit 2 I think that mooncakes are deliciou

掌握生词lantern /lnt (r)n/ n. 灯笼 p.9

掌握短语What a great day! kind of like

你知道下面这4种节日的英语说法吗？试试吧！

有关这4种节日的来源、传说、习俗、饮食、文化、庆祝方式有哪些？你能说出一些吗？

泼水节 Water Festival 龙舟节 the Dragon Boat Festival

春节 The Spring Festival 元宵节 the lantern Festival

2、 Listen and circle T for true or F for false.

Bill: Yes, it was really fun !

Mary: What did you like best?

Bill: I loved the ! They were really to watch. How fantastic the boat teams were!

Mary: Yes! And look at the colors of the boats. How they were!

Bill: I agree! But I guess it was a little too .

Mary: I don’t know…I kind of like to have more people around. It makes things exciting.

Bill: That’s true. Oh, and I really liked zongzi.

Mary: Oh, me too! The sweet ones are my favorite.

Bill: I if they’ll have the races again next year.

Mary: Of course! They have them every year.

Bill: Then I believe that I’ll be back again next year to watch the races!

What a great day! kind of like

It makes things more exciting be back again to + V

感叹句是表示喜怒哀乐等强烈感情的句子。一般说来，感叹句是由 what 或 how 开头的,其余与陈述句结构相同, 句末用感叹句，朗读时用降调。

what修饰名词或名词短语，有以下两种形式：

1. What+a(an)+（形容词）+单数可数名词+主语+谓语！如：

What an apple this is!

What a fine day it is!

2. What+(形容词）+可数名词复数或不可数名词+主语+谓语！

What kind women they are!

What nice music it is!

how用来修饰形容词、副词或动词。其结构是：How+形容词（副词）+主语+谓语！ How hard the worker are working!

How clever the girl is!

How quickly the boy is writing!

6、给下列句子加上适当的`主句Mary Bill thinks guesses believse让其成为宾语从句：

They were really interesting to watch

The colors of the boats were pretty

It was a little too crowded.

It makes things more exciting.

They’ll have the races again next year.

I’ll be back again next year to watch the races!

引述别人的原话叫直接引语，用自己的话转述别人的话叫间接引语。一这两种引语都是宾语从句，但直接引语放在引号内，不用连词连接；间接引语不用引号，通常用连接词与主句连接.

典型例句：1. She said ,” I like English very much. “ （直接引语）

典型例句：2. She said she liked English very much. （间接引语）

人称变化可以遵循如下顺口溜“一随主，二随宾，第三人称不更新”。

“一随主”是指在直接引语变间接引语时，如果从句中的主语是第一人称或被第一人称所修饰。从句中的人称要按照主句中主语的人称变化

Eg：She said. “My brother wants to go with me.”

→She said her brother wanted to go with her.

“二随宾”是指直接引语变间接引语时，若从句中的主语及宾语是第二人称，或被第二人“你”所修饰，从句中的人称要跟引号外的主句的宾语一致。如果引号外的主句没有宾语，也可以用第一人称

Eg：He said to Kate，“How is your sister now?”

→He asked Kate how her sister was then.

“第三人称不更新”是指直接引语变间接引语时，如果从句中的主语及宾语是第三人称或被第三人称所修饰从句中的人称一般不需要变化

Eg：Mr. Smith said，“Jack is a good worker.”

→Mr. Smith said Jack was a good worker.

1. ____ great fun it is to swim! 2._________ useful book this is !

3._____ a fine day it is today ! 4._______ hard work it is !

5.______ bad weather it was yesterday! 6.______ hard job this is!

7.______ terrible news we heard last night

8.______ good time we have every weekend!

9.______ long the bridge is! 10.______ long bridge this is!

11. ______ happy children ! 12. ______ friendly these kids!

13. ______ interesting book he has! 14. ______ time flies!

II 将下列直接引语变为间接引语。

1.Miss Gao said,“I like living here.”

Miss Gao said that living .

2.He said,“I’ll go tomorrow.”

He said that he .

3.My mother said：“I am going to make dumplings”.

__________________________.

4.She said：“I do homework every day.”____________________________________.

5.He said：“I will play basketball this night.”

_________________________________.

1. 李明说他对玩电脑游戏感兴趣。

Li Ming says _______ _______ interested in playing computer games.

2. 我认为玛丽不回来了。

I don’t think Mary ______ ______.

3. 山姆给我说他准备去上海。

Sam told me that he _______ _______ for Shanghai.

4. 请你告诉我去钟楼怎麽走吗？

Could you tell me _______ I can get to the Bell Tower?

5. 父亲说他买了一台新电脑。

Father said that he ________ ________ a new computer..

执笔龚琴审核初三英语组课型听说课课时 1

Unit 2 I think that mooncakes are deliciou

stranger /streind (r)/ n. 陌生人 relative /reltiv/ n. 亲属；亲戚

句子June would be a perfect time for you to visit.

【学法指导】自学单词---听说句子----听力练习----巩固练习

在假期中你去过哪儿？做了些什么？说出来与同学们分享一下。

Where have you been in this summer holiday?

When did you go ?

Why did you go there ?

stranger /streind (r)/ n. 陌生人p.10

relative /reltiv/ n. 亲属；亲戚 p.10

put on 穿上 put on weight put on ten kilos

3、pound n. 磅（重量单位）英镑（英国货币单位）

The apples cost one dollar a pound.

I am new in this city , so I am a ___________.

He often eats a lot,so he 20 pounds again.

Jenny is the only in that big city.

Read the sentencs in 2a,try to know their meanings

Listen to the conversation between Wu Ming and Harry and CIRCLE the correct words in the sentences.

Listen again, Wu Ming did a lot of fun activities, but there were also downsides. Listen again and fill in the chart.

Check the answers to 2a and 2b in pair.

Harry: What did you do on your vacation, Wu Ming?

Wu Ming: I visited my aunt and uncle in Hong Kong.

Harry: Wow! So what did you do?

Wu Ming: Well, we out a lot.

I believe that we ate at least five meals a day!

How delicious the food is! I’ve put on five pounds!

Harry: Haha! Yes, the food in Hong Kong i s delicious.

What else did you do?

Wu Ming: Shopping, of course. Hong Kong is a great place for shopping! I spent so much money.

Harry: So what was the best of the trip?

Wu Ming: Oh, the Dragon Boat Festival for .

They had teams from all over the world!

Harry: I’m planning a to Hong Kong next year.

I wonder whether June is a good time.

Wu Ming: Yes, if you want to see the boat races.

But it’s hot in June. That’s one thing I didn’t like.

Harry: Oh, I don’t mind hot .

Wu Ming: OK, then I think that June would be a perfect time for you to visit.

eat out a lot at least

five meals a day put on five pounds!

What else did you do ? a great place for shopping!

for sure a trip to+地点名词

June would be a perfect time for you to visit.

直接引语在改为间接引语时，时态需要做相应的调整。其基本法则和我们刚刚学过的宾语从句的时态变化一致，也就是说从句时态要和主句时态一致。如果从句是过去时，主句要向后退一格时态，变成一种过去时。

1. She said. “I have lost a pen.” →She said she had lost a pen.

2. She said. “We hope so.” →She said they hoped so.

3. She said,“He will go to see his friend。”

→She said he would go to see his friend. (一般将来 → 过去将来)

但要注意在以下几种情况下。在直接引语变为间接引语时，时态一般不变化。

①直接引语是客观真理。

Eg： “The earth moves around the sun and the moon moves around the earth”, the teacher told me.

→ The teacher told me the earth moves around the sun and the moon moves around the earth。

②直接引语是过去进行时，时态不变。

Eg：Jack said, “John, where were you going when I met you in the street?”

→Jack asked John where he was going when he met him in the street.

③直接引语中有具体的过去某年、某月、某日作状语，变为间接引语时，时态不变。

Eg： Xiao Wang said，“I was born on April 20, 1980.”

→Xiao Wang said he was born on April 20, 1980.

④直接引语如果是一般现在时。表示一种反复出现或习惯性的动作，变间接引语，时态不变。

Eg：He said, “I get up at six every morning.”

→He said he gets up at six every morning.

⑤如果直接引语中的情态动词没有过去时的形式（例：ought to，had better，used to)和已经是

过去时的形式时，（例：could, should, would, might）不再变。

Eg：Peter said，“You had better come have today.”

→Peter said I had better go there that day.

九年级英语课件篇4

本学期的中心任务是：疏导心理，激发兴趣，指导学法，夯实基础，培养能力。

在今后的教学活动中，教师需注意以下几点：

1、结合社会大环境，引导学生信仰学习，崇尚知识。

2、帮助学生树立起学习英语的自信心。

3、帮助学生制定自己的学习小计划，找出适合自己的学习方法。

5、激励学生主动、持久、高效地学习。

6、学习过程中注意因材施教，爱心感染。

三、本学期要达到的教学目标（包括知识与技能、过程与方法、情感态度三个方面的目标）

（一）知识与技能：

1、能够系统掌握七至九年级相关的教学内容，牢固掌握基础知识。

2、各知识间的区别于联系要明确，并在测试中做到不混淆。

3、由知识到能力的转化，技能明显提高，能够将知识和能力做到有机统一。

1、狠抓过程中基础知识的落实，以此促进能力的提高。

2、引导学生通过自主学习，进行知识的归纳、总结，使总结知识的过程成为掌握、提高、锤炼的过程。

3、抓好过程的调控，因材施教，并注重反馈和总结。

1、培养学生的积极性和良好的习惯。

2、促进学生间的合作，并体验创作的快乐。

3、对比中外文化的差异，开阔视野。

4、磨练意志，达到自我教育的目的。明辨是非，形成正确的人生观、世界观、价值观。

利用计算机辅助教学，渗透信息技术教育，拓宽学生视野。

四、教学进度：

1 Unit 11 Unit 11 Section A-Section B(2C)

2 Units11-12 Unit 11 Section B(3a)- Reading -Unit 12Section A(2c)

3 Unit 12 Unit 12Section A(3a)-Reading

4 Units13 Unit 13Section A-- Section B(2C)

5 Units13--14 Unit 13 Section B(3a)-Reading -Unit 14 Section A(2c)

6 Unit14 Unit 14Section A(3a)-Reading

8/9 专项复习名词、冠词、数词、代词、介词、连词、形容词、副词

13 题型训练阅读理解,完型填空,

英语四年级上册课件篇1

义务教育第三册

英语教案

第二课时

一、教学目标

1．要求学生能听懂录音并找出相应的照片，然后连线。2．看图并根据图中的意思写出句子中所缺的单词，能理解每一句话的意思。3．“四会”词句：her, his, my This is my mum.This is my dad.This is me.二、教学重难点要求学生写出句子中所缺的单词。在能听懂录音的情况下完成书中的句子。三教学用具

书、照片、单词卡片。

四、教学过程

（一）复习导入教师用照片介绍自己的家庭成员，引导学生也用自己的照片给同桌做相应的介绍。教师让学生拿出自己的照片试着向全班同学介绍自己的家庭成员。

（二）巩固练习做课本上的 Listen,look and match.2做课本上 Let’s practice.让学生先观察图片，然后教师问：Who is he? 学生回答:This is my dad.教师问:请问哪位同学知道这个空怎么填？学生齐答:填 dad教师说:Very good.请填写。然后教师问:Do you know,what is his name?

谁还记得?大家说:His name is bob.教师说：请大家填写。

4.观察第三幅图，让学生猜Who is he? 学生回答：This is me.让学生填空，并问大家:What is your name？学生边回答边填写:My name is Linda.同时出示写好的单词卡片。学生两人一组练习完成的句子，并用自己的照片做对话。

（三）做活动手册的听力练习。1.Listen,repeat and match.Listen and fill in the blanks.（四）作业

听写“四会”句子和单词。

第二课时

一、教学目标: 1 巩固前面所学内容。

2学会如何灵活运用本课句型做情景对话练习。“四会”词句：

Who is that?

This is my aunt.This is my uncle.This is my cousin.二、教学重难点：掌握 This is… 句型的表达法。2 掌握 Who’s that? 的表达法。

三、教学用具：

图片，照片，录音机。

四、教学过程：

（一）复习导入: 1 师生对话： T：Hello, boys and we are going to learn the second part of Lesson2.Are you ready for the class.S: Yes, I’m ready.2 进入复习。教师先出示照片向学生介绍说：This is my uncle and this is my aunt.This is my cousin.然后让学生同桌间用照片互相介绍。

(二)巩固练习听listen ,look and match.部分录音，让学生跟读，并找出相对应的图片来连线。

同桌间互相指着书上的图片练习。2做课本上Let’s practise 1

让学生三人一组扮演不同角色练习对话。3 做课本上

Let’s practice.让学生每人带一张“全家福”轮流上台向全班同学介绍。

（三）作业完整听本课录音。2 三人一组练习对话。

第二课时

一、教学目标掌握书中出现的新单词。能够运用所学句型自由对话。3 “四会”句子： He is friendly.He is lovely.They are Linda’s grandpa and grandma.二、教学重难点掌握“四会”句子.2 学会人名的说法：Jane, Smith, Jason

三、教学用具照片，录音机。

四、教学过程

（一）复习导入：

Hello, boys and girls.First let’s sing “Come and see my family”.然后教师出示照片问：Who are they? 学生回答：They are my grandpa and grandma.(二)巩固练习

1.听 Listen,look and match 部分录音，让学生跟读所听到的句子，找出相应的图片连线，然后让学生拿出自己的照片和同桌做练习。

继续听录音，让学生跟读句子找出相应的图片连线，然后领读he isfriendly.让学生理解 friendly 如：Mr Wang is friendly.2．做课本 Let’s practise 1

让学生看图中人物，两人一组练习对话。3．做课本 Let’s practise 2.先让学生完成例图，然后照样子做一张自己家的 Family Tree 4．做《活动手册》中的第4、7题。

（三）作业完整听本课录音。2 两人一组练习对话。

第二课时

一、教学目标： 1．熟练掌握句型：

How many people are there in your family?

Five

Who are they ? They are my mnm dad and I „ 2．能用本课句型自由对话。

二、教学重难点

重点： How many people …?

难点：能正确用 how many+名词复数形式…？

三、教学用具单词卡片，四、教学过程 1．组织课堂学说韵文。2．复习

快速认读one 到ten。

用图片让学生认读名称词。3．介绍新课

（1）复习对话并引出

。然后进行师生对话。

（2）放录音，让学生听课本 Listen ,look and say.部分，提问: How many „? 解释句子：What about you?

你呢？（用于问同样的问题）4．练习巩固

让学生分角色表演课本上的对话。做课本 Let’s practice

部分练习。5．布置作业听读第5课。

第二课时

一、教学目标

1．能听懂并会说单词: 2．熟练掌握句型: What is your father? He is „

Is the girl your sister? Yes ,she is

二、教学重、难点

What is your father︱ mother ?

三、教学用具，照片,录音机。

四、教学过程； 1．组织课堂

唱一支学过的英语歌曲，师生问候，开始上课。2．复习

快速抢答单词.复习对话: 3．介绍新课

介绍新句型:What is he ?

用图片反复练习句子：

What’s he ?

He is a … What is she?

She is a 4 练习巩固

听录音，让学生边看图边听录音。让学生两人一组练习课本上的对话。5．布置作业

（1）口头做《活动手册》第5题。（2）听读课本的对话部分，并背诵。

第二课时

一、教学目标： 1．复习巩固单词： 2．熟练掌握句型： What is your mother ? She is a nurse.What is in your hand ? A photo of my family?

二、教学重难点

重点：What is your mother ? She is a … 难点：该句型的熟练运用。

三、教学用具

图片，实物，录音机。

四、教学过程 1．组织课堂

唱歌曲：what’s he ? 师生问候，开始上课。

2．复习对话：师生自由对话，用上问候语、告别语、致谢语，问姓名、年龄、班级等。

3．介绍新课理解句子：

What is he? 他是做什么的？

What is in your hand ?.。你手里的是什么? A photo of my family.我家的照片 4．练习巩固：

让学生两人一组分角色朗读课文对话。5．让学生做《活动手册》上的题。6．布置作业

听读第六课录音。

第二课时

一、教学目标：能够听懂、会说、会演本课对话。学会怎样向别人介绍自己的家人和朋友。3 “四会”词句： kind, classmate, friend Welcome to our school.Nice to meet you.Are you a pupil in Grade 4?

二、教学重、难点：

1．掌握一般疑问句的问答方式。2．掌握所在年级的表达。

三、教学用具：

人物头饰、录音机。

四、教学过程：

（一）一复习导入 1．师生对话

2．听录音模仿人物，并跟读。3．三人一组分角色表演对话。

（二）二新授

1．教师放录音，让学生重复每句话。教师领读每个句子并让学生一个一个地读。

2．教师拿着图片给学生描述图片场景。如：Welcome to our school.3．同桌间用自己的图片相互描述图片的场景。

4．让学生表演各种场景。如：Nice to meet you.My mother is kind.等。

（三）巩固练习1．教师读This is our new classmate.几遍。做出欢迎状，教师领读Welcome to our class.几遍。

2．教师教读This is my friend.和What about you ? 几遍，让学生重复并翻译。

3．学生三人一组，分角色练习对话。

（四）作业

1．完整听本课录音，并重复跟读。2．书写“四会”句子和单词。

第二课时

一、教学目标

能听懂、会说、会演本课练习中的对话。会识别他人所在的位置。“四会”词句：

on the left, on the right, in the middle

二、教学重难点：

能够清楚地表达某人所在的位置。把所学内容灵活运用到实际生活中。

三、教学用具录音机，图片。

四、教学过程

（一）复习导入师生对话：

T: Wow ,what a beautiful photo!

S:This is my family picture.T:Who is the young woman on the right? S:She is my mother,and this is my father.（二）巩固练习

1.做Listen, look and match部分练习。2.做 Let’s practise 1 3.做 Let’s practise 2 4.猜人游戏：教师让三个学生背对着大家站着前面，老师问： Who is on the right/ on the left/ in the middle? 让学生分别来猜左、中右的人是谁？

（三）作业

1.做《活动手册》中的第4题。

2.用英语给家长介绍自己所学的方位词.7

第二课时

一、教学目标：

1了解现在进行时的表达方式。2掌握感叹句的用法。3 能听懂、会说句型： Let’s have a family dinnr.Let’s get together on Sunday evening.二、教学重难点

1.掌握现在进行时的表达方式。2．学习句型 let’s…

三、教学用具图片，录音机。

四、教学过程

（一）复习导入

出示各种图片和单词卡片，问学生：what’s this? What are they?

（二）巩固练习

1．介绍现在进行时态:is/ am/ are/ doing 表示正在进行的事情。如对话中的are getting together…

正聚在一起。are having a big dinner … 正在用餐。

2做 listen, look and match 部分练习。

3．教师放录音，学生跟读每一句话，并找出相应的图片连线。4 两人一组根据情景表演对话。

（三）作业

1．做《活动手册》中的第8题。完整听本课录音。

第二课时

一、教学目标：

1学会如何表达自己和他人的处所。

2灵活运用所学句型，并能在日常生活中使用。

3能听、说、认、读单词：vegetable,New Year ,London,Paris

二、教学重难点；

1．能根据图中的地点做替换练习。

2．能根据图画中的情景，描述居住的地点。

三、教学用具

图片，单词卡片，录音机。

四、教学过程

（一）复习导入：

1．Let’s sing an English song “the more we get together” twice.2.师生对话：

T: What picture is it? S: It’s a picture of my family.（二）巩固练习

1.做 Listen,look and match 部分练习。

教师出示图片A，问学生：Where do your grandma and grandpa live?学生回答：They live on a farm.教师出示图片B，问学生： Where do your uncle and cousin live?学生回答：They live in a village.教师出示图片C，问学生：Where do they live? 学生回答：They

教师出示图片D，问学生：Where do you live?学生回答：I live in a flat with my father and mother.2．做Let’s practise.1

3．做 Let’s practise2

（三）作业

1．完整听本课录音。

2．把图片的场景描述给自己的家人听。

第二课时

一、教学目标：

1．掌握have,has的用法。

2．掌握句形：What do you have? I have… 3．能够把所学知识灵活运用到实际生活中。4．“四会”单词和句子： fish, a little,big, fat, luvely, bird, What do you have?

二、教学重、难点

1．Have ,has 在使用时的区别。2．能听懂、会说本课对话。

三、教学用具

各种动物图片，录音机。

四、教学过程

（一）复习导入师生对话：

Where do you live? I live on a farm.What do you have? I have a cow, a dog, a goat,a duck and a hen.（二）巩固练习

1．讲述 have ,has 的用法及其与there be 结构的不同：there be 表示某处有某物，强调某物的存在，have, has 表示某人有某物，强调某物的所属。

2．做 Listen,look and match.部分练习。

（1）教师出示一张奶牛图片，说： I have a cow.问学生： Do you have a cow?

学生回答：Yes, I have a cow.教师领读几遍.（2）让学生看图，完整听录音并跟读然后指出相应的图片连线。3．做 Let’s practise 2.（三）作业

1．完整听本课录音，并模仿。2．做《活动手册》中的第6题。

第二课时

一、教学目标：

1.能够看图描述各种房间的状况。2．掌握几种表示方位的词。3．“四会”句子：

Where is your bedroom ? It is in the middle.二、教学重、难点

学会用形容词描述房间。

三、教学用具图片，录音机。

四、教学过程

（一）复习导入师生对话：

Where do you live? I live in the flat..What do you have? We have two bedrooms…

（二）巩固练习

1.学习句子：Where is your bedroom ? It is in the middle.2．做 Listen,look and match.部分练习。

（1）教师出示图片，介绍句子意思，学生选择，教师领读句子几遍.（2）让学生看图，完整听录音并跟读然后指出相应的图片连线。3．做 Let’s practise 2.（三）作业

1．完整听本课录音，并模仿。2．做《活动手册》中的第6题。

英语四年级上册课件篇2

2、正确辨别英文名字的姓和名，以及和中文名字的差异.

3、学会询问他人名和姓的句型.

【学习过程】：

1、个人自读，记忆本课单词.

2、小组相互检查单词读和写的情况.

3,、据汉语写出单词,小组竞赛并展示.

学习任务二: 能运用句型:What's your first name ?

My first name is....

What's your last name?

My last name is...进行交际.

1、试读下列姓名,尝试总结归纳.

First name :________ Last name: ________

2、理解下列对话,两人合作练习.

A: Hello! What's your name?

B: My name is Jack Smith.

A: What's your first name ?

B: My first name is....

A: What's your last name?

3、小组合作,练习自己的对话.

二、合作共建（教师寄语：Many hands make light work. ）

学会了询问他人的名和姓的句型后，能否用his/her做替换练习。

三、系统总结（教师寄语：No man can do two things at once.）

1、总结你所知道的名和姓。

2、自己编写一个询问他人姓和名的小对话.

四、诊断评价（一）用所给词的适当形式填空.

1. Nice to meet ______(your).

2. _____(she) name is Helen Black.

3. His family name _____(be) Mr Green.

4. ______(be) you Mr Green.

5. Hi, I _____(be) Lily.

1. Brown 是他的姓氏. Brown is ______________name.

2. 她的名是什么? ____________________name?

3. 你好,我是杰克. Hi, ________Jack.

4. 我的钢笔是黑色的. _____pen is ______.

5. 他的名字是吉姆. _______________Jim.

（三）根据上下文完成对话.

A: I'm Gina,________________?

B: My name is Linda Brown.

A: Is Linda your last name?

B: No.Linda is my __________. And Brown is ___________.

B: ____________________.

五、【课后反思】（教师寄语：Never do things by halves）

英语四年级上册课件篇3

Unit Five What would you like？

教材分析：本单元围绕“食品、饮料和餐具”展开教学，教学内容与日常生活密切相关，不难激起学生们的学习兴趣，milk, bread, ,water, egg等单词在三年级时听说读都已接触，老师重点让学生在“写”上下功夫，句型在回顾Can I have some ……，please ?的基础上，学习what would you like?句型，用来询问他人的需求，本单元八个四会单词，教师要严格要求，规范指导，为今后写的教学作个铺垫。

一、单元教学目标： 1.能力目标：

⑴能够询问一日三餐的食物及饮料。

⑵会使用用餐时的基本用语，如：What would you like for ……?Help yourself等。⑶能够听懂并发出传递与使用餐具的一些指令，如：Pass me a plate, please.Use the chopsticks.2.知识目标：

⑴掌握A、B两部分Read and write中，bread, egg, milk, water, rice, beef, fish, chicken 的拼写。

⑵认读A、B两部分Let’s learn, Let’s talk 中的单词和句子。(3)理解Let’s do, Let’s chant等部分的内容。⑷了解story time, Good to know等部分的内容。3.情感、策略、文化等有关目标

⑴情感、态度：激发学生学习英语的兴趣，培养学生学习英语的积极态度，使学

生乐于合作参与，勇于进行交际实践。⑵学习策略：注重合作学习。

⑶文化目标：了解中西方饮食文化方面的一些知识。

二、教学重、难点分析：

1.本单元教学重点是A、B两部分的食物、餐具名称以及就餐用语，其中难点是用餐时的基本会话，教师在教学词汇时，应结合过去所学的食物，饮料单词及句型，运用灵活多样的教学方法帮助学生理解、巩固、同时，在教学A、B部分Let’s learn 的词汇时，可适当铺垫渗透Let’s talk 中的句子，如：What would you like for ……？I can use …等，从而降低了对话教学的难度，然后通过朗读，操练，表演等方式使学生比较顺利地掌握用餐会话。

2.本单元主要学习与一日三餐相关的词汇与会话，引入新课时，适当复习句型Can I have a/some…？Do you like…？等，同时利用新的句型，如：What would you like for …？等滚动复习所学知识，新旧联系。交替复现。

三、课时分配：

第一课时：A Let’s learn Let’s play C.Let’s draw 第二课时：A Let’s talk Make a survey.第三课时：A Read and write C story time 第四课时：B Let’s learn Let’s do C Good to know.第五课时：B Let’s talk Let’s chant.第六课时：B Read and write C Let’s check.第一课时

教学内容：A.Let’s learn Let’s play C.Let’s draw 教学目标：

1、知识目标：认读本课中的单词和句子：rice ,noodles, fish, beef, soup ,vegetable, What would you like for dinner? I′d like some…

2、能力目标：能够听、说、认读单词rice, noodles.fish.beef.soup.vegetable.初步掌握What would you like for dinner ? I’d like some ….3.情感、策略、文化等有关目标

（1）情感态度：激发学生学习英语的兴趣，培养学生学习英语的积极态度，使学生乐于合作参与，勇于进行实践。(2).学习策略：注重合作学习。

教学重点：能听说，认读rice, noodles, fish, beef, soup, vegetable.教学难点：能够正确读单词vegetable.教学准备：

1、教师准备食物、饮料的图片和一顶纸帽。

2、学生准备本课六个生词词卡。教学过程： Step1 Preparation 1.Enjoy the song “An apple a day”,师播放歌曲，让学生在快乐的学习氛围中投入到本节课学习。2.Free talk.:①T：(出示苹果图片)Do you like apples? ②T：(把图片给学生)I like apples, Can I have some apples? Ss: Sure.Here you are.③老师出示不同的图片，让学生问，学生答(生生互动，师生互动)可采用集体和个别结合的方式。

④用以上方法，复习juice, bread, milk, chicken, hot dog, hamburger等单词和句型。Step 2 Presentation

1、单词导呈 ⑴教学单词 rice T出示图片，板书教读rice,注意升降调教学。指出“I”发字母读音「ａi」“e” 不发音，渗透音标教学。

齐读说:rice rice I like rice(集体→个别)T: What do you like ? Ss: I like rice.What would you like for dinner? 帮助学生回答：I’d like rice.⑵同样方法教学soup, fish, beef.⑶教学Noodles(教师做饥饿状)T：You’re full ,But I’m hungry, because I had very little at breakfast.Guess , what did I have? T：(动作演示)They’re long，S：Noodles, T: 板书：hungry ,noodles,教读 B :Let’s sing and act.唱歌曲：Noodle Noodle Dumpling.配以动作。⑷ 教学 Vegetable, T:I like noodles very much..Guess ，What else do I like? Ss: Fish/…？

T：No ,I like vegetables.T(拿出各种蔬菜实物图片)Look: I have many kinds of vegetables, Carrot is a kind of vegetables, Tomato is a kind of vegetable.T把图片发给学生，T：I like vegetables, Can I have some vegetables? S1：Sure, Here you are.S1→S2→S3……

2、听读正音。

放录音，生指单词跟读。

2、合作学习。

（1）全班齐读，小组齐读、个别读。

（2）小组内兵教兵，此时，教师辅导检查后进生。Step3 Practice(1)听音，找图片。(2)看口型猜单词。Step4 Production.Let’s play.(1)教师扮演一名顾客，请一名同学上台戴好纸帽扮演营业员，师生之间练习对话：Can I have some…please? Sure ,Here you are ,2/… yuan。付钱时可象征性

地拍一下对方的手。(2)同桌表演(3)个别展示。Step5 Progressr.一、Draw your own menu.二、Homework：用 “what do you like?”调查小组内同学的喜好食物，不少于3人。

第二课时

教学内容：A Let’s talk Make a survey

教学目标：

1．能力知识目标：1能听懂会说：What’s for dinner? Wait and see , What would you like for dinner? I’d like some …,please ,Everything’s ready.2.能运用句型：What would you like for dinner? I’d like some …“进行相互调查。2．情感、策略、文化目标：培养学生学习英语的积极态度，勇于进行交际实践的能力，同伴间合作的能力。

教学重点：能听懂、会说Let’s talk中的话。

教学难点：能听懂、会说：What would you like for dinner? I’d like some…, please, Everything’s ready.教学准备：

1、教师准备rice soup, fish, vegetable的图片。录音机、大磁带。

2、Ss 准备食物、饮料词卡。教学过程： Step1 Preparation 1.Sing the song“ What would you like?” 2.Revision ①T：出示rice, soup, beef, fish, noodles, vegetables图片，让学生说出英语名称(集体→个别)。

(2)T出示以上实物的词卡，齐读、个别读的形式交替进行。

⒊Free talk 借助刚才的图片和词卡互问互答：Can I have some……，please.Sure.Here you are.Step2.Presentation

教学What’s for dinner? Game:猜晚餐吃什么？ T：(出示各张食物图片的背面)What’s for dinner? Guess!Ss：beef/…rice/…?

T：Beef/…is ready,(把图片逐张贴在黑板上)教学Everything’s ready

T：(教师贴完图片后小结)Everything’s ready.让学生理解意思，操练由集体到个别，并板书领读。

教学What would you like? I’d like some…，please。

(1)紧接着上个环节问学生：What would you like?引导学生回答I’d like some…领读操练问句和答句并板书。(2).Ask and answer in pairs.4．教学wait and see.师点拔，让学生理解。5．Chant: What’s for dinner? What’s for dinner? What would you like for dinner ? Rice and soup , rice and soup.I’d like some rice and soup.Step3 Practice 1．听音答题

Q1：What would Mike like? Ss: listen and answer.Check the answer.2.听音正音

师说：Open your books，turn to Page 59,listen,point and read aloudly.3．合作共建： ⑴全班齐读

⑵小组齐读，其他组注意听。

⑶个别学生读，其他学生听，并纠正。

⑷小组合作分角色读，师巡视全班，随时指导各个小组活动。4．表演展示：

让学生分角色表演对话，检查两组。Step duction 见课本P59 Group work Mike: What would you like for dinner ？ Chen Jie: I’d like some… … 让学生询问组内成员完成调查表。Step 5 Progress 1.小结：老师或学生总结本课主要内容，让学生齐读，使本课内容前后融合。Homework：熟读对话，可以尝试翻译背诵对话。

第三课时

教学内容:A Read and write C: Story time 教学目标：

1、能力知识目标(1)四会掌握bread, egg, milk, water.(2)能听懂：What would like for breakfast?

2、情感、策略、文化目标：培养学生学习英语的积极态度，勇于进行交际实践的能力，同伴间合作的能力。

教学重点：bread, egg, milk, water 的拼读。教学难点：bread, egg, milk, water 的拼读

教学准备：老师准备食物、饮料词卡和一个大石英钟以及猫和松鼠的头饰。学生准备食物、饮料词卡。教学过程： Step 1 Preparation 1.Sing a song “What Would You Like ?”

2.Free talk 师生问答: What would you like for dinner? I’d like… …然后同桌开火车操练，连锁问答。

3.学生听Let’s learn ,Let’s talk部分的录音，跟读，齐读。Step 2 Presentation 1.出示一个石英钟，告诉学生It’s 7:00.I’m hungry.It’s time for breakfast, 让学生理解此句意思，师板书领读breakfast.接着问：What would you like for breakfast?

多让几个学生回答。2.做“猜一猜“游戏

让学生问: What would you like for breakfast? 师回答：I’d like some… 师注意说到食物、饮料单词时只做相应口型，不发出声音，让学生猜是什么单词，师板书在四线格内，师口型示范的单词分别是 bread, milk, water, egg., 教学生拼读并书空，注意总结字母或字母组合的发音规律。Step 3 Practice 1.Read and say.（1）Ask and answer in pairs.For eg: What would you like? I’d like some bread.B—r—e—a—d.bread.（2）Write down the words: copy three times.看谁写的又快又对。（3）组内比赛记单词。2.Write and say（1）让学生自己填写，师解释 a glass of… What a big breakfast!的汉语意思。然后师出示答案，同桌交换检查（2）齐读

（3）合上课本，学生手拿词卡，比赛谁说的短文熟练。Step 4 Production

1、Make a survey:小组内一人扮记者，调查组内同学。用What would you like for breakfast?问，I’d like…作答。.Story time：（可当本课读的拓展），师准备道具让学生表演更能激起学生的兴趣。

Step 5 Progress 1.小结：让学生总结本课学习主要内容，齐读。或让个别同学说，其他同学补充。2..Read and write P 35 见配套练习

（1）A: Can I have some , please?(牛奶图)B: Sure.Here you are.(2)A: What would you like ? B: I’d like an.(鸡蛋图)。（3）A;What would you like for breakfast? B: Some(面包图)。（4）A: Have some ,please.(一杯水图)3.．Homework: 做出本课的四张四会单词的卡片，放到家中的实物旁。背诵这四个单词的拼写。四上U5B1（词汇课）

教学内容：B.Let’s learn Let’s do C.Good to know 我的设计教学目标：知识目标

1.能够听说认读单词 plate, fork, knife , spoon, chopsticks.2．听懂指示语，并按照指令做出相应动作、能力目标：能听说认读本课词汇，并在实际生活中运用。

情感、策略、文化目标：培养学英语用英语的兴趣培养学生学习英语的积极态度，勇于进行交际实践的能力，同伴间合作的能力。了解中西方餐饮文化方面的知识。教学重点：能够听说认读plate, fork, knife , spoon, chopsticks.教学难点：chopsticks.的发音。

教学准备：1.师准备盘子，叉子，刀，汤匙，筷子等实物。2．学生准备餐具生词词卡.教学过程： Step 1 Preparation 1.Sing a song“What would you like?” 2.师出示词卡复习：bread, egg, milk, water.3.齐读P60 Write and say Step 2 Preparation ⒈单词导呈 ⑴教学plate 师出示实物plate,板书并教读。指出a发字母读音，e在词尾不发音并渗透音标教学，进行升降调教学。师把盘子递给一个学生，说pass you a plate,再让学生传给自己，说 Pass me a plate.让全班同学齐说！师再把盘子递给一个学生教会学生说：Can I help you? 师可释意。并回答Yes, pass me a plate, please!然后把学生分成两大组，对话操练。⑵教学knife 师出示实物，板书并教读knife,指出“i”发「ai」,词尾e不发音，升降调教学，动作演示并说：Cut with the knife ,然后师生齐做动作齐说指令，渗透Let’s do 教学。⑶教学spoon, fork,用教学knife 的方法教学 spoon, fork 并渗透Let’s do 教学。⑷教学chopsticks 出示实物，板书chopsticks分音节教学，指出筷子常用复数形式，渗透use the chopsticks.2..听读正音 3.合作共建，Step3 Practice 1．看口型猜单词

2．找朋友：两组同学，一组拿图片，一组拿词卡，看谁找的又对又快。3．Let’s do

⑴听录音，观察图片。⑵听录音，做动作。⑶听录音，边说边做。⑷小组内操练。Step4 Production 猜一猜，以下朋友会用什么餐具？

师出示：Sarah, Amy, Mike, ChenJie , ZhangReny的图片（或让学生看课本前面的人物图），Good to know:师简要介绍有关西餐甜点的小知识。Step5 Progress、1、小结：总结本课主要内容。

2、Homework：用我们学过的餐具组成一幅图，并说一说，相信你一定做得很棒！

第四课时

教学内容：B Let’s talk Let’s chant 教学目标：能力知识目标：

1、能听懂、会说I can use chopsticks.Let’s me try ,Help yourself.Let me show you.Mm……Yummy.I like Chinese food,.we had a good time.See you tomorrow.Good night.2、听懂指示语，并按照指令做出相应动作，情感、策略、文化目标：培养学生学习英语的积极态度，勇于进行交际实践的能力，同伴间合作的能力。了解中西方餐饮文化方面的差异。教学重点：能听懂、会说 Let’s talk 中对话。

教学难点：能听懂、会说：I can use chopsticks, Help yourself.课前准备：1.师准备盘子、叉子、刀、汤匙、筷子等实物。2.师准备录音机，磁带、教学挂图。3.学生准备餐具词卡。教学过程： Step1 Preparation

1、Sing a song“What would you like?”

2、词卡复习plate, knife, chopsticks, spoon, fork.3、听录音，齐做P61，Let’s do Step2 Presentation 1.师手指教学挂图，说：look!Dinner is ready, what would you like for dinner? 再问：Do you like Chinese food or English food? 然后板书并领读：I like Chinese food ,It’s yummy.师进一步说：Help yourself!并板书教读。

2.师出示刀叉，说：I can use the fork and knife, Let me show you, Can you use the

fork and knife?帮助学生回答，然后板书并读：I can use the fork and knife / chopsticks.Let me show you , /Let me try.3.晚餐结束时，我们可以说we had a good time ,Good night, see you tomorrow,师板书并齐读。Step3 Practice 1.听音答题

把听到的句子选出来，师检查答案并释义： ⑴Help yourself.⑵We had a good time.⑶See you tomorrow.2、听音正音跟读对话，纠正发音 3.合作共建

四人一组分角色朗读课文，必要时请老师指导。4.表演展示

请学生用恰当的语音语调表演对话。读的最流畅的一组获胜。

Let’s chant ：先让学生观察图片，说出英语名称，用Pass me 分别说出句子。师再放录音，跟录音齐说。Step4 Production 小组内试着编一组新对话，用本课会餐时的语言材料。Step5 Progress

1、小结：总结本课主要内容。

3..Read and choose.⑴A ： ? B： Thank you.⑵A ： ? B： Me too.⑶A ： ? B： Good night.⑷A ： ? B： ok, Here you are.A.Pass me the Chopsticks.I like Chinese food.B.I like Chinese food.C.Help yourself.D.Good night.3．HW: 听录音，读熟对话。

第五课时

教学内容：B Read and write C Let’s check 教学目标：

能力知识目标：

1、掌握单词 rice, chicken fish，2、能听懂：What would you like for dinner? 情感、策略、文化目标：培养学生学习英语的积极态度，勇于进行交际实践的能力，同伴间合作的能力。教学重点：四个四会单词拼读。教学难点：四个四会单词拼读。

课前准备：师准备带有四线格的图片，学生准备词卡，图片。教学过程： Step 1 Preparation

1、Sing a song “What would you like?”

2、P62 Let’s chant.3、让学生分组分角色表演对话。Step 2 Presentation

1、师接着上一环节出示图片，问：Would you like rice? Can you spell rice? 师出示词卡并贴在黑板上，齐拼读、个别拼读，进一步问学生，what would you like for dinner?引导学生齐说：I’d like some rice.2.同样方法教学 beef, fish, chicken.3.听读正音 4.合作共建 Step 3 Practice Read and say

1、Ask and answer in pairs.S1: What would you like for dinner? S2: I’d like some chicken, c-h-i-c-k-e-n.2、Write down the words, copy them five times.3、组内比赛记单词。Write and say 1.让学生自己做，师解释You can’t eat so much.“你不能吃这么多” 2.师检查学生做的情况 3.齐读

4.合上课本，手拿图片，比赛谁说的熟练。Step 4 Production

1、Make a survey:小组内一人扮记者，调查组内同学。用What would you like for dinner? I’d like……作答。

2、Let’s check P23 第一遍只听不选，第二遍边听边选，第三遍检查。Step5 Progress 小结：让学生总结，老师补充。配套：P38

1、listen and write(1)chicken ②fish ③rice ④ beef

2、Read and write A：What would you like for dinner? B：I’d like some

鸡蛋图

A：Can I have some, please.一碗大米图。B：Sure ,Here you are.A：Would you like some

? 牛肉图 B：Yes ,please.A：I’d like some。鱼图 B：OK.Here you are.Homework：

1、抄写四会单词五遍，试着默写一遍。

2、把Write and say 部分,熟读并自己表达出来。

英语四年级上册课件篇4

1.通过练习课本第22、第23页Let’s practise(Ⅰ)、(Ⅱ)掌握本课的主要内容。

2.让学生表演各种动作，进一步练习巩固现在进行时。

二、教学重、难点(Key points and difficult points)

1.重点练习“现在进行时”复数形式的表达法。

We are jumping rope.

They are playing volleyball.

2.通过动作、表演以及游戏掌握第22、第23页的练习。通过比较，引导学生理解现在进行时与一般现在时的用法。

3.要求学生进一步掌握Let’s go and join him/them的不同意义和用法。

1.老师带领学生复习时间的表示法。

What time is it?

It’s…

Is it time to…?

Yes,(No,)it’s time to…

What time do you…?

At…

2.老师带领学生复习星期的表示法。

What day is it today?

It’s Sunday/Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday.

3.老师将准备好的跳绳、篮球、足球、排球等拿出来分给一些学生，指导他们开展各种活动。然后，老师指着个别学生问大家：What is he/she/David doing? He/She is playing… He/She is jumping rope.老师再指着一些踢球的同学问大家：What are they doing? They are playing… They are running.

4.老师放录音，学生完成第21页Listen, look and match。

1.学生用自己的图片进行What is he/she/David doing? He/She is playing… He/She is jumping rope的问答练习。

2.让个别学生到前面来，举起自己的图片问其他学生：What is he/she/David doing?What are they doing?这时，老师可以叫一个学生背对图片来猜He/She is playing… He/She is jumping rope. They are playing… They are running.做练习的同时，老师板书I am doing… He/She is doing… We are doing… You are doing… They are doing…提醒学生观察进行时态的动词结构，强调现在进行时态中助动词be要与主语人称和数一致。

3.老师再将准备好的跳绳、篮球、足球、排球等拿出来分给学生，并指导他们活动起来。然后，老师抽查个别学生说：What is he/she/David doing?待这个学生回答He/She is playing…后，老师说：Let’s go and join him/her. 并带几个学生去参加其他学生的活动。复数形式也可以这样练。

4.学生两人一组进行第22页的对话练习。等大家都练完后，老师可以叫个别同学看图回答问题。也可以叫4~5人一组合作完成这个练习。

1.听录音，读课文。

2.和父母一起练习对话。

3.预习《活动手册》第Ⅲ题。

Ⅲ. Listen and say.

录音内容：

The boys are playing basketball.

The girls are playing volleyball.

They are doing their homework.

We are doing our homework.

We like playing.

We like studying.

英语四年级上册课件篇5

1.通过唱Days of the week 这首歌，让学生进一步掌握一周7天的表示法。

2.通过口、笔试练习，要求学生掌握现在进行时各人称和系动词的搭配。

3.让学生看图说对话并进行情景表演。

1.学生学会本课的歌曲，人人知道意思并能进行表演。

2.通过口、笔头练习，要求学生进一步掌握现在进行时各人称的不同表示法，以及它们与系动词的搭配。灵活使用He/She is doing something. We/They/You/The boys are doing something.

老师带录音机和自制的周历、图片。学生拿《活动手册》、打球、做游戏、跳绳、玩悠悠球的图片。

T：Is it time to go home?

S：No, it’s time to play games.

T：Oh, we play games on Wednesday.

Let’s go and play. Look!

What is he doing?

S：He is playing football.

1.先用自制的周历提问What day is it today复习一周七天。

2.让学生听录音欣赏一遍歌曲。

3.老师讲解这首歌的意思。

Sunday la la la,

Monday la la la,

Tuesday la la la , Wednesday,

Ia Thursday la la la ,

Friday la la la , Saturday.

星期天，啦啦啦，星期一，啦啦啦，

星期二，啦啦啦，星期三，啦，

星期四，啦啦啦，星期五，啦啦啦，

星期六。这就构成了一星期。

4.老师带领大家读这几个词，然后反复放录音教学生学唱这首歌。

5.老师和同学们一起唱，并分组进行比赛。

老师拿起几张图片和学生进行问答练习。老师说问句：

What is he/she/David doing?

He/She is playing…

What are they/you doing?

They/We are playing…

1.完成《活动手册》上没有做完的练习。

2.预习下一课。

3.准备一些可以做礼物的材料。

英语四年级上册课件篇6

教学目标

1. 知识与技能：学习16个辅音音标及两个元音音标〔e〕〔i〕，让学生能听懂，能正确地发音。

2. 过程与方法：训练学生通过学习这18个音标的正确发音，拼读包含这些音素的单词音标的能力。

3. 情感态度与价值观：培养学生学习英语的兴趣、热情，以及小组之间的合作意识。

教学重难点

1、能正确读出这18个音标。

2、能正确拼读包含这18个音素的单词音标。

教具：字母卡片、音标卡片、单词卡片、录音机及磁带、头饰

教学过程

Step 1 Warming up

1、 Free talk.

2、 Sing the song 《A B C》.

录音机播放《A B C》song. T and Ss sing together.

Step 2 Presentation

1、 T: We learnt vowel letters. What are they?

Ss: a e i o u

T: How do you pronunce them in closed

Syllable?

Ss: /æ/ /e/ /i/ /כ/ /۸/

T: Look at letters “e” “and” “i”

We pronunce /e/ and /i/ in closed syllable.

板书 -e- /e/ -i- /i/

让学生有节奏性读/e/ /e/ /e/ /i/ /i/ /i/

2、T shows letter cards “b p m f d t n l g k h r s z v w”

让学生用英汉对照方法复习其在单词中的读音。

3、师出示音标卡片，教学生有节奏地读卡片中的音标。

4、Ss listen and read after the tape.

Step3 Drills

1、Play a game “Get the apples”.

板书简笔画(画一棵苹果树，树上每一个苹果上面都粘贴一个音标)，教师任意读一个音标，让一些学生去摘掉，摘对的学生奖励苹果贴画一个。

学生摘完后，教师再次教学生有节奏地读这些音标。

2、 T: Look at the word “vest/vest/”. Who can spell?

教师指名让学生有节奏性拼读

教师依次板书，学生有节奏进行拼读。

-ea- /e/ -e- /e/ -i- /i/

bread /bred/ vest /vest/ skip /skip/

head /hed/ hen/hen / swim/swim/

legs/legz/ gift/gift/

3、T shows some word cards. 让学生有节奏地拼读。

egg/eg/ friend/frend/ little/′litl/

next/nekst/ bend/bend/ desk/desk/

ready/′redi/ milk/milk/ hill/hil/

pig/pig/ dead/ded/ six/siks/

4、Play a game

让学生戴上有上面音标的水果头饰，教师说单词音标，戴有这个单词所包含的音的头饰的学生主动按序站在相应的位置，下面学生有节奏地拼读。

/bed/ /hed/ /bend/

/desk/ /hil/ /siks/

/ gift/ /sit/ /red/

/frend/ /leg/ /vest/

/men/ /hen/ /hiz/

Step4 Consolidation and development

分小组轮流到前台，让组里每名同学戴上教师事先准备好的单词及音标卡片头饰，这些单词是我们以前没有接触过的。但是，这些音标包含我们今天学过的16个辅音音标和2个元音音标，让小组中两个捞单词及音标的同学面对面握住对方双手，并向上方抬起;其余人试图从这两个同学中间穿过。捞单词及音标的同学要问：What is your name?被捞的同学说：My name is desk [desk]…说对的就可以让他过去。

Step5 Homework

朗读练习册Ex.1音标.。

Step6 练习

1、Play a game “Get the apples”.

板书简笔画(画一棵苹果树，树上每一个苹果上面都粘贴一个音标)，教师任意读一个音标，让一些学生去摘掉，摘对的学生奖励苹果贴画一个。学生摘完后，教师再次教学生有节奏地读这些音标。

2、让学生戴上有上面音标的水果头饰，教师说单词音标，戴有这个单词所包含的音的头饰的学生主动按序站在相应的位置，下面学生有节奏地拼读。

/bed/ /hed/ /bend/

/desk/ /hil/ /siks/

/ gift/ /sit/ /red/

/frend/ /leg/ /vest/

/men/ /hen/ /hiz/

板书设计 Lesson 1 I can swim

b p m f d t n l g k

/b/ /p/ /m/ /f/ /d/ /t/ /n/ /l/ /g/ /k/

h r s z v w e i

/h/ /r/ /s/ /z/ /v/ /w/ /e/ /i/

-ea- /e/ -e- /e/ -i- /i/

bread /bred/ vest /vest/ skip /skip/

head /hed/ hen/hen / swim/swim/

legs/legz/ gift/gift/

英语四年级上册课件篇7

教学目标： 1. 进一步复习巩固职业类单词和主要句型。

2. 能听懂、会说、会读句型it's cold today, isn't it? guess! what do you want to be? i want to be … 并获得运用所学语言进行交际的能力。

3. 了解辅音字母组合dr和tr在单词中的读音。

4. 能演唱歌曲they sing happily.

重点难点：句型it's cold today, isn't it?的理解和句型what do you want to be? i want to be …的实际运用。

1.t: (ppt 1 显示课题)hello, boys and girls. nice to see you again.

t: 在第三单元中，我们已经学习了询问别人姓名和年龄的句型，你还记得吗?现在我们一起来复习复习吧!(ppt2呈现句型，带读)

t: now let's watch a cartoon.你能记住动画中的句子吗，为动画配音吗?(pp3播放g1动画)

t: is it interesting?其实这个故事就藏在我们的英语书上。open your books at page 28. please read in pairs.

t: can you try to answer the questions?(ppt4呈现问题，待学生回答后逐题呈现答案)what's the girl's name? yes, she's mingming. and how old is she? she's two. the girl has a doll.小女孩还有个娃娃呢?what's the doll's name? it's mingming, too. how old is the doll? it's two, too.

t: 好!现在我们来试着给动画故事配音吧!(再次播放动画，静音)

t: 看完了mingming和娃娃的故事，我们再来看看这个故事吧。(ppt5播放e部分动画)now, look at your books, page 27. read after me, please. 跟我读。

t: 在这个故事中，(ppt6呈现句子及中文)yang ling说的it's cold today, isn't it?是一个反问句，意思是“今天很冷，不是吗?” 英语中的对话很多时候是以谈论天气开始的。因为天冷，所以一群老人正在运动。(ppt6再呈现老人们)look at that old woman in the red sweater? (ppt6呈现句子)who's she? (停1秒)yes, she's yang ling's grandmother. so yang ling says 'she's my grandmother.' (ppt6呈现句子)how old is she? about sixty? 大约60岁?guess! (停1秒)no, she's eighty. (ppt6呈现句子)

t: now, listen and repeat.现在请大家跟读一遍。 (ppt6完整呈现对话，点击播放句子读音)

t: ok. please try to act this dialogue in pairs. one will be yang ling, one will be su yang. 请你和同桌分角色表演这一小段对话。先请这两位同学给大家做个示范吧。(学生示范)

t: have a try, please. 大家开始表演吧。

t: 在本单元中，我们还学习了一个重要的话题：如何谈论别人的职业。请看这些句子。(ppt7呈现句子)

t: now, let's look, guess and say. (ppt8-10呈现图片和句子)

t: 我想每位同学都有自己理想中的职业，what do you want to be? 你想做什么呢?你问别人以后想从事某种职业时，可以说what do you want to be? (ppt11呈现句型)跟我说一次(注意看教师的口型)。别人问你时，你可以这样回答i want to be a/an …(ppt11呈现句型，带读) t: 下面我们就用这两个句子做个调查，在调查中要及时记录调查的结果。ask and answer one by one, and write down the record. 我们来给大家做个示范。

(教师和四个学生作示范：教师和学生a问答后，转述他的答案后记录在书上的表格内)

t: (师生示范结束后，展示结果，特写拍书上的表格)ok, let's have a look. how many boys and girls want to be a teacher? two. how many boys and girls want to be a cook? one.

t: 同学们学会了吗?please begin. 请你们开始调查吧。(停几秒)ok. 课后不要忘记和同学分享一下你的调查结果。

t: 又到了练习读音的时候了。(ppt12呈现图片)look at the picture. i can see a pair of trousers in the tree. (点击出现单词trousers和tree) what's this? yes, it's a blue dress. (同上) and the dress is the driver's.(同上) (ppt12呈现完整的句子，带读单词和句子)

t: 字母组合dr通常读作/dr/，组合tr通常读作/tr/。请大家记住它们。

t: 在本单元的最后，让我们来学唱一首和职业有关的歌曲吧。(准备播放歌曲，ppt13画面停留在歌曲题目)they sing happily.他们唱得真开心。(ppt14播放歌曲)

t: now let's listen to it again. this time you can try to sing. (ppt16再播放歌曲)

这首歌曲可以很好地帮我们复习学过的职业类单词，希望你在课后也可以练习唱一唱。

t: 在第三单元中，我们一起学习了有关询问他人年龄、职业等相关的语言知识，还学习了歌曲they sing happily. 相信你在今后的学习生活中能很好的运用所学到的知识进行交流。 bye!

英语四年级上册课件篇8

教学目标: 1.感知并归纳i-e在单词中的发音规则。 2.能够读出符合i-e发音规则的单词;能够根据单词的读音拼写出符合i-e发音规则的单词。 3进能够根据单词的读音拼写出i-e发音规则的单词。

1. 教师让学生看图片,风筝被遮住,教师提问:what’s he doing?从学生的回答中引导出fly a kite,教师出示风筝图片,板书kite,引导学生拼读/k/-/ai/-/t/---/kait/.

2. 教师指着风筝的图片提问:Is the kite nice? 学生回答 Yes, it is nice. 并拼读nice。

3. 教师继续指着风筝图片提问:what do you see on the kite? 并突出风筝上的9,学生回答nine。教师板书nine,引导学生进行拼读。

4. 教师提问:do you like the nice kite? 学生回答 yes, I like it. 教师板书like和nice。

5. 教师出示歌谣第一段文字: see the nice new kite, with a big number nine. 学生跟着录音有节奏的朗读。教师关注学生的i-e发音是否到位。

6. 完成Read, listen and number的活动。

二、强化i-e在单词中的发音。

教师出示更多含有i-e结构的单词,比如bite, site, dive, mine, side, time, wide等,让学生尝试拼读出来。

三、作业布置(homework) 自主读出以下单词:five ride,lick six bib pig pin kiss ink hill

英语四年级上册课件篇9

课题：Unit 4 My home

课时：第四课时

教学目标：

1、Learn the sentences

2、Learn the animals

教学重点：The new words

教学难点：The new words

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

Step2: Learn the new words of fruits

1、Look at the fruits

2、Learn the new fruits

3、Listen to the recording

4、Read the words

5、Say out the fruits

6、Step3: Let’s do

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen and do

Step4:Exercises

1、《基础训练》

2、 Look and say

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 4 My home

Where are the keys?

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the words.

九年英语课件

想要更深入了解相关信息的话，不妨看看《九年英语课件》，我相信这对你会有好处。在教学过程中，教案和课件都是基础的组成部分，每位教师都应该认真考虑自己的教案和课件。教案是教学创新的必要手段之一。

九年英语课件篇1

一、学生情况分析：

九(1)班共有学生36人，特点是班里尖子生不是很多，中间生占也不多，差生面大。当然大部分学生课堂学习积极性较高，回答问题较积极，能做到自觉完成作业、自觉背诵课文。有部分学生受学习态度、风气的影响，刻苦学习之风渐渐稀薄，轻浮之风开始产生，很多学生上课不认真，课后死记硬背，当然绝大部分还是劳逸结合，掌握了科学的学习方法。从学生成绩来看，存在明显不平衡，虽然上学期有所进步，但和平行班比较，还有很大的差距。

二、教材内容分析：

本教材共4单元，按要求，从开学到三月中旬要结束新课。此外，本学期增加了口语与听力训练的比重，以便于教好的完成人机对话和听说读写的全面训练。

其内容主要反映了学生的日常学习和生活。课本设计题材范围更广，反映了学生对未来生活的想象，如移居火星、拥有机器人生活方式、学习世界上著名伟人的事迹以及著名景点的介绍等。教学内容渗透了思想品德的因素，寓思想教育于语言教学中。并且教材配备了练习册、听力练习、听力训练教学光盘及中英文教参等必不可少的教学辅助工具。

三、教学目标要求：

(一)总体目标：及格率：30%，优秀率：10%。

(二)具体要求：

1、认真钻研教材教法，把握教材并把“新课程标准”的理念贯彻到我们当然英语教学过程中每让学生通过体验、实践、参与、合作、交流和探究等方式，学习并使用英语，并激发和鼓励学生学好英语，不断进步;

2、努力提前完成教学任务，为中考复习作好充分的时间准备。

(1)搞好集体备课，认真钻研教材教法，把握重点、难点、有的放矢地进行教学。

(2)加强教育的思想性，根据对学生进行思想品德教育的精神，在本学期的英语教学中，要加强德育的渗透，寓德于教。对学生进行跨文化教育、爱国主义、集体主义教育，培养遵章守纪、勤学好问的品质。

(3)充分把握教材特点，加强教育的条理性，有浅入深、由易到难、由已知到未知循序渐进地安排上课顺序;有条理地安排教学内容，不断复习，多次循环，逐步扩展和加深;在用中学，积极地运用语言;以最大限度激发学生的英语学习兴趣，寓教于乐，并能使他们学以致用。

(4)加强英语教学的听力训练，利用好录音带、作好听力练习、定期进行听写训练。加强英语教学的阅读训练，搜集并整理课外阅读材料，让学生经常阅读，提高阅读量和阅读技能。摸清学生掌握知识的程度，查漏补缺，并对差生及时补救。

四、教学进度安排：

首先，(2月22日至3月22日)完成新课教学，迎接学校的第一次月考。

第一轮(3月23日至4月23日)复习阶段搞好基础知识的复习。这一阶段应按教材顺序归纳语言点，讲透语言点运用，对各单元的知识要点进行梳理，同时应注重基础词汇、词组、句型的过关。做到：

(一)根据复习内容，布置适量的难度适中的练习;

(二)循环考试，即每学完一部分后，进行阶段性测试，对试卷进行评分登记，以充分调动学生的学习积极性和自觉性。

第二轮(4月24日至5月30日)复习要求突出重点，牢固掌握。第二轮复习直接关系到中考的效果。知识掌握不系统、内容混淆互相干扰，解题时应会判断失误，做错题目。这要求教师在这一阶段复习过程中防止简单的重复，反对面面俱到，而是遵循精讲多练的原则，做到讲——练——评结合。

第三轮是考前指导与适应性训练(6月1日至学业毕业考试)主要目的是适应中考要求，提高应试技巧。本轮侧重培养学生审题解题能力，同时要在教师指导下进行综合练习和模拟测试，知识考查和能力考查并重，从而使复习达到良性的循环：知识——能力——知识。

2022英语九年级教案篇2

九年级下学期这一阶段的复习工作十分关键。面对着升学的压力和任务，面对着这两个班学生的英语程度相差很大的实际情况。我们要更加深入地研究教材，根据学科特点及学生特点研究切实可行的课堂教学模式和复习模式。同时，要进行分层次教学。对于基础好的学生要加大知识的容量，拓展知识的层面，使他们更上一层楼;对于基础较差的学生要因势利导，因材施教，使他们在原有的基础上有所提高、有所收获，为将来的学习打好基础。

一、学生情况分析

从本次期末的第一次质量预测的成绩来看，九年级(7)、(8)两班学生的英语学习情况和其他几个班级很相似，学生英语水平普遍较差，成绩好的不多，部分学生已经对英语失去了信心，还有一部分学生觉得英语越来越难，渐渐力不从心了，不感兴趣了，发言也不是很活跃。针对这种情况，教学的时候需要注意在备课中增加趣味性，以此来提高学生对英语学习的兴趣，同时注意在面对绝大多数学生时，注重打好基础，从最基本的东西抓起，避免拔苗助长。

二、具体目标和措施：

针对以上实际情况，我准备从以下几个方面着手，调整教学目标和教学措施：

1、继续针对中考题型的要求，确定如何努力提高学生语言技能：

听力方面：能听懂课文大致内容;能抓住简单语段中的观点;回答比较简单的问题。说即口语表达方面：能使用恰当的语调和节奏表达课文大意;能经过准备就一般话题作短暂表达。

阅读理解方面是个重点，要求能理解阅读材料中不同的观点和态度;能通过分析句子结构理解难句和长句;加强阅读理解的训练。

写作：能简单写出连贯且结构较完整的句子，能在写作文中基本做到文体较规范、语句较通顺;能够较好的达到中招考试对大多数学生的要求。

2、中招考试，既要突出重点，又要顾及全面，坚决坚持分类教学，分层推进的教学思想，使各类学生都能学有所获，都能有所提高。针对学生英语基础普遍较差的情况，从基础抓起，抓好英语基础知识。逐步做到语音、语调自然、得体;运用词汇描述比较复杂的事物、行为和特征，说明概念，进一步掌握描述时间、地点、方位的表达方式等;尽可能学会使用规定的习惯用语或固定搭配，掌握基本句型和时态。避免平时考试中的常见性错误，提高学生应对考试的能力。

对于程度较好的同学，要逐一进行分析、谈话，摸清他们的特点、思想和看法，有的放矢，促其进一步发展。

3、与其他各科教师搞好配合。使得每一个学生都能够全面发展，不至于出现严重的偏科现象。

要面向全体学生，关注每个学生的情感，激发他们学习英语的兴趣，帮助他们建立学习的成就感和自信心，使他们在学习过程中发展综合语言运用能力，提高人文素养，增强实践能力，培养创新精神。在此基础上突出学生主体，尊重个体差异，让学生在老师的指导下构建知识，提高技能，发展心智和拓展视野。

2022英语九年级教案篇3

本学期是整个九年制义务教育的最后一个学期，学生即将面临着中考考验。这是一次真正意义上的选拔考试。迎接好这次中考就成为本学期教学的一个重要工作。因此，在教学中应该帮助学生理解、吸收、吃透教材，对教材中的知识进行内化，即进行综合、应用、创新和中考思维的升华，把书本知识变成学生自己的知识。要有一定的时间作强化训练，通过训练，锁定差距，然后提出弥补差距的可操作性对策措施，千方百计缩小差距，改变尖子生少、中间断层、底子大的现状。对学生分批分层地辅导和督促，让他们实现最佳的成长理想，实现取得好成绩的愿望。

一、指导思想

深入贯彻教育教学理念。认真总结教学经验，努力把学生的英语基本功打扎实，同时还得加强对阅读能力和综合应用能力的培养和指导，使学生在这方面的能力有所提高，力争在今年的中考取得一个理想的成绩。

二、情况分析

1、学生情况分析

九年级226班本学期50多人，225班本学期也有50多人，上学期英语最高分113，最低分40。从上学期成绩来看尖子生少、中间断层、底子大，参差不齐，给上课带来很大的难度，平均分不及过差线。大部分学生基础差，想学的少，在里面混日子的有很的大一部分，男生居多。他们的学习情绪不稳定，也不能坚持不懈，少数几个中间生平时基本能够配合老师的教学，但自觉性和定性不足，有些默不出声，精神不振，课后很少复习功课，上课不注意听讲，问题出来了不动脑筋想，而是急于去想课本上找答案，半天说不出个所以然来，学习方法不灵活，需要老师的督促才会有所作为;但也有一些学生学习积极，他们主动完成各种练习，上课非常主动，他们属于班上的佼佼者，成为英语学习的领头羊。因此，抓中间、促两头是本期的主要任务。并且让学生努力复习整个三年级的英语，做好初中毕业考试的准备是重中之重。

2、教材分析

本学年英语教学内容为半册，共3个单元，从上学期结束已经上完12个单元，剩余3个单元计划在4周内完成教学任务。具体教学内容包括：

词汇：识记、理解、掌握书中的所有单词，熟练应用重点单词和短语，复习初中前四册中的所有单词。

语法：掌握8种时态，一般现在时，一般过去时，一般将来时，现在进行时，过去进行时，现在完成时，过去完成时和过去将来时。了解部分构词法，掌握英语的基本句子结构：五种简单句，并列句，复合句，状语从句，定语从句，虚拟语气及感叹句等。

阅读：主要训练学生根据问题找细节的能力。然后根据不同同学的水平，再分层次阅读文章。在阅读过程中针对长句子(复合句及含有多个从句的复合句)要教给学生分析句子结构的能力。

写作：书面表达是中考中失分最大的题目，所以对于大多数同学，先落实平时训练，要求学生注意多写基本的英语作文。注意句法结构。还应注意学生的对话练习。

听力练习：多组织学生进行听力训练，并多组织考试，尽量使用磁带教学。

三、教学进度安排

第一周到第四周完九年级全部教学内容;第五周复习初一第一到第六单元，第六周进行七至十二单元复习，第七至八周复习初一下册，第九到十周复习初二上册，第十一到十二周复习初三内容，第十五至十七周进行语法专项训练，第十八周进行写作和听力训练。如名词、代词、数词、冠词、形容词副词、动词、句子结构、复合句、交际用语、写作。

四、教学措施

根据学生的情况和班上的实际，本学期采用以下措施：

(1)首先要从思想上扭转学生以往的不良学习习惯和态度，培养学生自觉的学习习惯，动脑的优良习惯，课堂上精讲多练。即将面临的是中考，学生的态度变化多变极不稳定，要动员好学生做好思想工作。

(2)根据学生各人的具体情况，要求各自提出明确的学习目标，具体的分数，每次考试后都要进行分析并制定下一次的目标只准前进不许后退，督促他们刻苦学习。

(3)每堂课一定注意学习效果，突出重点难点。务必要求学生掌握必须掌握的基本的东西。注意让学生做好笔记。每天都要布置作业不然有的学生比较懒散。对英语而言记忆背诵是很重要的，应多让学生听写生词和句子，采取各种不同的方法和手段每天跟踪复习，随意抽查。

(4)教学过程应突出学生的主动性，指导学生主动地获取知识，科学地训练技能，全面提高综合应用能力。要提倡灵活多样的教学方式，鼓励运用探究性、启发式和讨论式的学习方式。要避免繁琐的语法分析和琐碎机械的练习。

(5)重视创设英语学习的环境，沟通课本内外、课堂内外、学校内外的联系，拓宽学习渠道，增加学生应用的机会。作文教学与阅读教学相结合，在写作中学阅读，阅读中学写作。

(6)利用课外时间进行培优补差、抓两头，促中间。把学生分成两类，中上学生提高括充知识点，中后学生有一定潜力的，提高和发展的空间较大，以抓好基础知识为重。缩小两极差异兼顾整体共同进步。

(7)要想学好英语就要用英语。让学生开口说英语。这对学生来说非常重要。应积极鼓励他们多说、多听，不怕说错。让好学生多带头。

总之，本学期是非常关键和重要的一学期，抓住机遇、认真实施教学计划，尽一切力量为中考做好准备，争取让学生考出更好的成绩。

2022英语九年级教案篇4

一、指导思想

深入贯彻教学十字方针。认真总结教学经验，努力把学生的英语基本功打扎实，同时还得加强对阅读能力和综合应用能力的培养和指导，使学生这方面的能力有所提高，在强化书面英语的同时注重学生听力和口头表达能力的培养和提高，力争在今年的中考取得一个理想的成绩。

二、学生情况分析

17班的同学本学期更加活泼好动，对学习抱着可学可不学的态度，兴奋地准备迎接毕业。对于这种情况，不能放任学生继续散漫，要加强思想教育，控制不当行为。而从上学期期末考的成绩来看，实验一的学生的英语学习情况总体不容乐观，学生英语水平普遍较差，成绩好的不多，有一部分学生已经对英语失去了信心，还有一部分学生觉得英语越来越难，渐渐力不从心，不感兴趣，学习变得极为被动。针对这种情况，教学的时候需要注意在备课中增加趣味性，以此来提高学生对英语学习的兴趣，同时注意在面对绝大多数学生时，注重打好基础，从最基本的东西抓起，注重复习的有效性，避免走马观花，急于求成。

三、九年级下册英语教材分析

九年级新授12—15单元，复习：七年级每册12个单元全册24个单元(4个复习单元)，八年级上12个单元(两个复习单元)，八年级下10个单元(两个复习单元)九年级18个单元(三个复习单元)。为了加强学生的阅读能力，从八年级下册开始在每单元的后面设置了具有跨文化内容的语篇及相关练习。

四、九年级下册英语教学措施

根据近几年中考试题新特点及学生实际情况，采取"三轮复习法"作为毕业班的总复习计划，"三轮复习法"要求先全面学习，后进行重点复习和适应性考试复习。做到着眼全面，突出重点，点面结合，把全面复习和重点复习有机结合起来。这样既系统全面又有所侧面的复习，能使学生较好地掌握所学的知识考出优异成绩。

第一轮复习针对学生对已学基础知识，在复习过程中，还要采取一些必要的措施来巩固和增强复习效果。如做到：(一)根据复习内容，布置适量的难度适中的练习;(二)循环考试，即每学完一部分后，进行阶段性测试，对试卷进行评分登记，以充分调动学生的学习积极性和自觉性。时间：3月中旬—4月份。

第二轮复习要求突出重点，牢固掌握，进行专项训练。要求学生对那些在教材中多次出现和辅导教材中一再提及，反复强调部分，应视为重点，格外加以注意。同时有针对性地指导学生记忆的方法，培养记忆能力。既要教学生解题要领，帮助学生理解题目与题目之间的联系，同时又针对历年中考题型强化训练，使学生在答题时做到灵活运用，触类旁通，举一反三。时间：5月份。

第三轮是考前指导与适应性训练相结合，主要目的是适应中考要求，提高应试技巧。本轮侧重培养学生审题解题能力，同时要在教师指导下进行综合练习和模拟测试，知识考查和能力考查并重，时间：6月份。

五、后进生转化

A类学生：课堂上要求能回答较难提问，思考问题积极，教学任务能当堂完成，课后要求阅读一定量课外读物，考试时要求失分不大。

B类学生：加强双基教学，多鼓励多表扬，使他们爱好英语，并且用抓两头促中间的办法使他们时时有危机感。要求能较好地完成教学任务，能回答上课提出的稍难问题。

C类学生：教学中多关心、多爱护他们，平时与他们多进行谈话，让他们认识到英语学科的重要性，平时对他们要求严格但要求不过高。

六、九年级下册英语进度安排

新授：12—15单元 2月26日—3月12日

第一轮复习：七上 3月13—3月18(3单元/节)

七下 3月19—3月26 (2单元/节)

八上 3月27—4月5 (2单元/节)

八下 4月8—4月19 (2单元/节)

九年级4月22—4月30 (2单元/节)

第二轮复习：专项训练 5月4日—5月18日

(名词、动词、代词、形容词、五大时态、句型分类)

专题训练 5月21—5月30

第三轮复习：考前指导与模拟考试相结合6月3—中考

2022英语九年级教案篇5

一、教材分析

我们使用的是《仁爱版英语》，仁爱版英语教材是加拿大英语专家和北京市仁爱教育研究所的中国英语专家依据《英语课程标准》，编写的七年级零起点英语教材。它起点低，三年六册学完后，均可达到《英语课程标准》之要求——五级水平，可以与任何版本的高中课程英语教材衔接使用。具有如下的特点：

1、教材内容体系的安排由浅入深，循序渐进，由简单到复杂逐步过渡;重视新旧知识的结合和语言现象的复现。

2、体例体系新，教材创造了国内最新版课标英语教材编写体例、体系，编写思路清晰，符合学生认知发展规律，方便初学者培养英语学习兴趣，从而很快进入英语学习的状态。。单元按语言功能意念项目编排，每一话题四个小节(section)按听说读写的语言技能编排。

3、语言地道，对话之中融入情感态度和文化意识，使学生能在交流中用英语介绍祖国文化，加深对中华民族文化的理解。

4、好教易学，教材充分体现新课标的指导思想，把任务型教学与交际教学法灵活地运用于英语课堂。

二、重难点突破

本期不仅要完成本册教材内容，而且要复习完成好初中三年来所学的全部内容。本期的重点是对初中三年来所学的语法和常用表达法进行归类，如：现在完成时、直接引语和间接引语、被动语态等，难点也是语法和基本句型，这些重难点都应通过在语言材料的学习中及时强化和总结，在练习和实践中开展综合探究活动，进一步拓展学生的语言知识，围绕课题(project)探究活动构成每个单元的核心，让学生综合运用在本单元所学的语言知识、语言技能，提高用英语获取信息、处理信息、分析和解决问题的能力。而以历史人物活动为线索的对话，能很好地培养学生听说能力;同时，轻松实现学科之间的渗透和交融;培养学生的爱国意识，增强民族自信心和自豪感。教材的每个活动设计都很有技巧，既培养学生搜集信息、积累知识，灵活运用所学语法知识的习惯，又提高综合运用语言的能力。使学生在学习对话中融入情感态度和文化意识;在交流中用英语介绍祖国文化，加深对中华民族的理解。在学习贴近学生生活的阅读材料时，让内容鲜活、富有深刻哲理的阅读材料促使学生阅读能力提高，进而帮助学生树立正确的人生观和价值观。总之，通过对各种任务活动的开展和对语言的及时归纳总结，有效地提高学生学习效率，激发学习兴趣，对语言功能的认识逐渐由感性上升到理性，以达到巩固、掌握和运用的目的，最终形成语言技能。

2022英语九年级教案篇6

一、教材分析

定语从句是本单元的语法要点，是在1-8单元已经对该语法知识有所渗透的前提下安排的。本节课话题是让学生体会音乐在生活中无处不在，体会不同类型音乐的特点，学会热爱生活;能用简单的定语从句形式表述自己的观点。通过本节的学习，增强学生对复合句的理解，提高其对此句式的应用能力。

二、三维目标

1、知识目标：

掌握本单元基本词汇，学会恰当的使用引导词that ,who

2、能力目标

1)掌握功能句“What kind of music do you like ? I like music that I can dance to . I love singers who can write their ownmusic.”

2)能够自如地谈论自己所喜欢的音乐和音乐家。

3、情感目标：

通过学生谈论对音乐和音乐家的好恶，从而使学生学会欣赏音乐的美。

三、教学重点

1)本节课的教学重点是学会并掌握先行词为物或者人时，引导词“that ,who ”的使用方法。

2)“prefer …to…”的用法

3)掌握有关音乐的词汇和相关的词组，能够比较流利地描述自己喜欢的音乐，运用功能句 “What kind of music do you like ? I like music that I can dance to . I love singers who can write their own music.”

四、教学难点

定语从句运用

五、教学策略

采用任务型语言教学，实施情境教学法、小组合作探究法、情感激励法。

六、教学准备

自制多媒体课件(PowerPoint);录音机(A tape recorder)

七、教学环节

1、课堂导入

⑴ Warming up

⑵ Discuss: Do you like music? What kind ofmusic do you know?

⑶ There aremany kinds of music such as pop ,jazz, rock……. Let Sstalk about the kinds of music..(多媒体出示)

⑷Let Ss read 1a. Explain the sentences:

I prefermusic that has great lyrics=I like music that has great lyrics better.

lyrics:the plural form is often used.

Ask Ss topractice in pairs then make up a short passage using the four sentences on thescreen.

2、课堂讲授

Explain attributive clauses.

定语从句：在复合句中修饰名词或者代词的从句叫做定语从句。先行词是“人”时，用关系代词who引导，先行词是“物”时，用关系代词that来引导

I love singers who write their ownmusic

I like music that I can dance to.

a. that即可代表事物也可代表人，which代表事物;它们在从句中作主语或宾语，that在从句中作宾语时常可省略关系词，which在从句中作宾语则不能省略。而且，如果which在从句中作“不及物动词+介词”的介词的宾语，注意介词不要丢掉，而且介词总是放在关系代词which的前边，但有的则放在它原来的位置

b. which作宾语时，根据先行词与定语从句之间的语义关系，先行词与which之间的介词不能丢

c. 代表物时多用which，但在带有下列词的句子中用that而不用which，这些词包括all,anything, much等，这时的that常被省略

d. who和whom引导的从句用来修饰人，分别作从句中的主语和宾语，whom作宾语时，要注意它可以作动词的宾语也可以作介词的宾语

e. where是关系副词，用来表示地点的定语从句

3、课堂练习

Fill inthe blank with who that

1).I have a brother _______likes soccer.

2)Tom doesn’t like movies_______are too long and too scary.

3) We prefer groups ________ play loud and energetic songs.

4) He likes friends_________ often help each other

4、课堂活动

1) Askand answer in pairs:

What kindof music do you like best? Why?

I like popmusic/classical music/jazz music/country music/dance music, etc. And tell thereasons.

2) Listento four pieces of music .Then practice the conversation in pairs.

3) Showseveral pictures and introduce their favorite singers ,groups and so on..

4) Practice in pairs and talk about their favorite kinds ofsongs, singers and groups.

5) Listenand complete 1b,2a and 2b.

5、课堂小结

在定语从句中，先行词是“人”时，用关系代词who引导，先行词是“物”时，用关系代词that来引导。

I love singers who write their ownmusic

I like music that I can dance to.

who / that 在定语从句中做主语时，谓语动词的单复数应与先行词保持一致

I prefershoes that are cool.

I like apizza that is really delicious.

I lovesingers who are beautiful.

I have afriend who plays sports.

6、作业布置

Write a composition about the kinds of the friends they likeand dislike

八、板书设计

Unit9 I like music that I can dance to

1.prefer….to….=like …better than……

Iprefer singing to dancing

2.Attributiveclauses(定语从句).

I love singers who write their ownmusic

先行词 “人”

I like music that I can danceto.

先行词 “物”

九、教学反思

通过本单元的学习，不仅能使学生学会本单元的功能句，而且通过创设情境调动学生的积极性和自主性，使学生敢于用英语交流和表达，学习中遇到困难，愿意主动向他人请教，并有较强的合作精神，使学生进一步体会到英语学习的快乐与成就。

2022英语九年级教案篇7

一、教材分析

1、教学内容

本单元以"产品制造"为话题，共设计了四大部分的内容。以"What are the shirts made of?"为主线，围绕着谈论_东西在那制造，原材料是什么等语言功能展开一系列的任务活动，通过第一部分的学习，要求学会有关things和materials等基础词汇，并了解、学会基本句型的应用。教材内容从基本语言知识到语言综合知识的运用，层层递进，以一种循序渐进的生活化的学习程序，引导学生在做事中有目的的学习语言。

2、教学目标

①知识目标：

1.掌握本课时重点单词和短语be made of 、be made in。

2.了解一般现在时态和一般过去时被动语态的结构和用法。

3.归纳和掌握make 构成的短语。

②能力目标：学会谈论产品是由什么制成的及它们是在何处制造

③情感目标：学会赞美他人的物品，并能就此话题礼貌的进行交谈，树立品牌意识，努力学习的态度。

3、教法策略

以任务型教学策略为主，采用情景教学法(如本单元新知识推导时)、听力训练法(处理听力材料)、并辅助个人自学、小组讨论和图片等兴趣策略教学。如在新授单词时，通过一些图片，进行分析教学，以致于从视角引起他们注意从而记住单词。采取任务型教学策略的目的是主要是让学生多练多用，在做中学、学中乐、乐中掌握。

4、学习策略

采用合作式学习方式，有目的的让学生预习，在完成任务的活动中主动的学习语言，养成继续学习英语和学好英语的良好习惯。强调学生不仅要在课上积极发言、多练，并鼓励他们课后积极进行英语学习、积极参加训练。

二、重难点分析

重点词汇通过图片和对话解决。如：chopsticks, coin, blouse, silver, silk, be made of等。

难点：听力训练;用功能语言句进行口语训练。

三、教学准备：图片、录音机等

四、教学过程：

1、课前任务设置，在课前，我让学生提前预习单词。另一方面铃声响的时候，首先检查学生对第五单元单词的识记情况，让学生看着图片，用"what is it?"等句子问，用新单词回答，在此期间，让学生感知"What are they made of? Where are they made of"的重点句型结构，把单词教学融入句型，培养学生情境中理解记忆单词的能力。

2、为了更好的提高学生观察能力，以任务型教学为理念，让学生有目的的结合重要句型完成Activity 1a的部分。

3、完成1a部分后，为了更好的巩固学生对上面方框中重点单词的理解程度，让他们通过听觉进行训练，培养学生在用中学、学中用的能力。

4、通过单词记忆、听力训练中，学生们对重要句型的初步接触和熟悉，请学生讲解重要短语be made of/be made from/be made into/be made in/be made by/be made up of和重要的语法：被动语态。掌握被动语态的用法和结构。为下一步准确说话做铺垫。

5、为了更好的运用重点句型结构，我让学生在1c部分读完对话后，用1b里边的句子进行对子活动，进而提高学生的口语表达能力。

6、通过列举世界知名品牌：中国瓷器、美国的李维斯牛仔裤、意大利的普拉达眼镜、瑞士手表的图片，进行师生问答，进一步巩固所学语法。并进行情感教育：中国需要努力，你们需要努力。之后通过六个基础题型来检测他们对本节课重点知识的掌握。

5、总结本节课所学的知识，梳理知识结构，并通过家庭作业让他们更好的掌握本节课内容。

总之，整节课，我始终遵循任务型教学的理念，以学生为主体，以任务为中心，以交际为目的，以课程标准为理论依据，以高效课堂为载体，坚持让学生学会在生活中运用语言，始终遵循一个原则，就是让学生乐学，因为兴趣是最好的教师，整个过程中我也一直采用激励机制给有所表现的学生以鼓励，以增强他们学习英语的信心。

2022英语九年级教案篇8

复习目标

熟练掌握现在完成时态的用法。

课前准备

要求学生在课前复习这两个单元，背诵课文的部分段落、对话和单词，复习现在完成时态，及动词的变化形式。(P255--257的动词不规则变化表)

知识要点

一、现在完成时态的构成

have/has+动词的过去分词

二、与现在完成时态连用的常用副词，词组

just，already，yet，ever，never，several，times，so far，in the last/past few years。

already一般用于肯定句中，而yet一般用于疑问句或否定句中。

三、现在完成时态表示过去发生的动作对现在造成的影响或结果

四、现在完成时态也可表示过去发生的动作一直持续到现在的动作或状态，可以和表示从过去某一时刻延续到现在(包括“现在”在内)的一段时间的状语连用，常以for和since引导

for和表示一段时间的词组连用。

since和表示过去某一时刻的词或词组连用。

Have/has been to 与have/has gone to的区别：

Have/has been to意为“已经去过某地，且已回来”，have/has gone to意为“去了某地，但还未回来”。

五、现在完成时态中延续性动词与短暂性动词之间的转换。

现在完成时态可以表示已经发生了的动作持续到现在(包括相应“现在”在内)的动作或状态，但动词必须是延续性动词，因此，如果句子需要现在用现在完成时态，有些短暂性动词要改成相应的延续性动词或词组，常见的有：leave—be away， die—be dead ， buy—have，

borrow—keep， open—be open， begin/start—be on，

arrive/reach/get—be in， come/go—be in， get up –be up

get ill/fall—be ill， join—be in the /be a member of

2022英语九年级教案篇9

教学目标

Key vocabulary: ancient, club, composition, pupil, meeting, call, even

Key structures: That’s news to me! What’s it about? Listen up, everyone.

Anyone else? That’s a fantastic idea listen up

教学重点

Get to know the wonders of the world

教学难点

Language points

教具

多媒体，tape 课时 2

教学课程

Step1 Warming-up and listening

1. Look at some pictures of the wonders of the world.

2. Talk about the picture. You can use the words in the box to help you.

3. Listen and check the words you hear.

Step 2 Listening and reading

1. (Close the books) Listen to the tape carefully.

2. Ask the students to read through the conversation individually.

3. Play the tape and have them read and follow.

4. Act it out.

5. Learn Everyday English

Step 3 Do Exercises

1. Choose the best answer in Activity 4.

2. Listen again and check.

3. Answer the questions in Activity 5.

Step 4 Explain the important and difficult points

Step 5 Pronunciation and speaking

1. Listen to the sentences.

2. Listen and repeat.

3. Say the sentences aloud.

Step 6 Homework

Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex. 1, 2, 3&4

个人修改

Revise what we learnt last term.

Show the pictures and learn the new words.

Read the key sentences.

Read the dialogue in roles.

2022英语九年级教案篇10

Unit 3 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?

一、教学目标：

1、语言知识目标

基本词汇：restroom, stamp, bookstore, postcard, pardon, washroom, bathroom, normal, rush, suggest, staff, grape, central, mail, east, fascinating, convenient, mall, clerk, corner, polite, politely, speaker, request, direction, correct, direct, whom, address, underground

基本句型：Excuse me, do you know where I can buy some medicine?

Sure. There’s a supermarket down the street.

Could you please tell me how to get to the post office?

Sorry, I’m not sure how to get there.

I wonder where we should go next.

Could you tell us when the band starts playing this evening?

You should try that new ride over there.

2、技能目标：

(1)能用宾语从句礼貌的寻求帮助。

(2)能用正确的方法指路。

3、情感目标：培养学生尊重他人，对人有礼貌，热爱生活。

九年英语课件篇2

一、教学目标

1. 掌握宾语从句的构成和用法.

2. 正确运用宾语从句:重点掌握注意宾语从句的三类引导词,从句的语序及主从句的时态呼应关系,不能忽视宾语从句的一些特殊情况.

二、教学重点

目标1和目标2

三、教学难点

目标2

四、教学过程

Step1、Warming-up

T ask: Do you know this teacher?(point to a teacher)

Ss:

T say: I know the teacher.

I know she is a very good teacher.

T ask: Is she a beautiful girl?(point to a girl)

Ss:

T say: I think she is beautiful.

T ask S1: How old are you?

S1: I am...

Then ask Ss: What did she say just now?

九年英语课件篇3

一、教师简介：

二、教材版本：oxford english s henzhen edition

三、课题名称：7a chapter 3 troubles

1.认知目标：

课标词汇dial, ambulance, fire service, trouble, tourist, stare, steal, purse, missing, hurry, report, gate

拓展词汇ferry, argue, aboard, theft, handcuffs

2.能力发展目标：

1）培养学生通过课前预测（predicting），略读（skimming），找读（scanning），了解重点大意（major ideas）等阅读微技能来逐步提高阅读水平。

2）帮助学生建立初步的语篇结构意识。

3.情感目标：

当别人遇到困难时，学会即保护自己，又能帮助到别人。

（二）教材分析：

本节课是深圳版《牛津初中英语》（初一）第3单元的导入课。该教材的导入课分为漫画、单元导入（a）及单元导入（b）三部分。教师紧扣单元主题，增加了两个教学环节：①小偷video的导入环节；②遇到困难时即能保护自己又能帮助别人的group work.

（三）学生分析：

刚刚开始初中生活的'学生，对事物充满了好奇心，能积极主动的参与课堂。但大部分学生还没有完全适应初中英语的教学模式，并且学生的英语程度参差不齐，自主学习的能力较弱。

（五）教学方法：

warming up由视觉感官冲击引入本单元主题show a series of pictures a bout police, ambulance and fire service.ask students what the pictures are about and what number do we dial to call them.multi-

leading-in引出本节课主题，激发学生的学习兴趣。show the students a video of a theft. answer two questions, and lead in the topic: “dealing with trouble”. multi-

pre-reading结合本课主题，引导学生达到情感目标的培养。do a questionnaire: what will you do if you see a thief? work in groups an d d iscuss the question with classmate.multi-

培养学生搜寻细节信息的能力。look at the title, the introduction and two picturesfind the answers of the two questions.multi-

while-reading任务型教学play the tape.answer the questions with true or false after listening.tape recorder

培养学生搜寻信息的能力guide the students to read through the text.reading the text by themselves and find the answers.m ulti-

show time在理解课文的基础上，根本对话将课文内容展现出来。get the students to work in groups and practice the work. then act out the dialogue.

homework巩固课堂所学，为下节课做准备read the text by themselves and finish the paper.

二、课后反思：

通过对本节课的学习，培养学生通过课前预测（predicting），略读（skimming），找读（scanning），了解重点大意（major ideas）等阅读微技能来逐步提高阅读水平。学生理解了课文的内容，并能用英语将课文的内容通过表演的方式呈现出来。并且懂得了当别人遇到困难时，学会即保护自己，又要帮助别人。

本节课的设计简易明了，并且能够层层深入，通过运用不同的教学方式来设置活动，达到学生对课文的理解。运用了角色扮演的方式，来激发学生对故事的重现，扩展了学生的思维。增强了课堂教学的趣味性和实用性。

video部分的失误成了这节课最不应该出现的问题。

三、课例点评：

1.赵老师在课堂上教态亲切、自然、有激情。口语流利，能用全英语驾驭教学。

2.这节课采用多媒体教学，课件精细，设计构思精巧，准备充分。

3.课堂引入真实、有趣。教学环节衔接自然。在教学过程中，培养了学生听、说、读、表演的能力。

4.整节课自始至终激发学生积极参与、体验、合作与交流，充分发挥了学生的主体作用。

建议：1.课堂上问题的设置应该考虑到学生的各个层面，有难有易，有梯度。

2.课后要布置预习作业。

九年英语课件篇4

一、学习目标：

知识目标：能正确使用Module 6 中的单词和短语;

能力目标：能掌握谈论环境的日常交际用语，并能简单介绍环保举措，劝说人们增强环保意识;

情感目标：引导学生提高环保意识。

二、重点、难点：

重点：1. 掌握句型It’s+adj.+to do sth.;

2. 掌握短语throw away, instead of, do harm to, make a difference to，stop…from …的用法;

3. 初步了解前缀和后缀。

难点：1. for example, such as 与like的区别;

2. instead of 和rather than的辨析;

3. 前缀，后缀构词法的构成。

三、知能提升：

(一)重点单词

[单词学习]

1. waste

【用法1】n. 浪费

【例句】These meetings are a waste of time. 这些会议真是浪费时间。

【用法2】v. 浪费

waste sth. on sth. 在某物/某事上浪费钱财、时间等;

waste time (in) doing sth. 浪费时间做某事。

【例句】Why do you waste money on clothes you don’t need?

You are wasting your time (in) trying to explain it to him.

【用法3】adj. 无用的;废弃的

【例句】Waste paper can be recycled.

注意：wasteful adj. 浪费的

如：It’s wasteful to throw away your old book.

【考查点】词义理解。

【易错点】词性混淆不清。

【考题链接】It’s bright enough, turn off the light, please. We shouldn’t w___________ electricity.

答案：waste.

解题思路：此题考查waste的用法，句意为“这里足够明亮了，请把灯关了。我们不应该浪费电。”故填写waste，这里waste作动词。

2. environment

【用法】n. 环境

它是由动词environ(包围)+名词后缀-ment 构成的名词。类似的词有：development， excitement

【例句】The children have a happy environment at school.

【考查点】词义理解。

【易错点】environment的拼写。

【考题链接】

We should prevent the pollution of the e_______________________.

答案：environment。

解题思路：此题考查environment的拼写，句意为“我们应该防止环境污染。”故填写environment。

3. product

【用法】n. 产品，制品

【例句】The company sells plastic products.

与product相关的动词是produce，意思是“制造，生产”。

如：Many kinds of machines are produced in this factory.

【考查点】词义理解。

【易错点】product的拼写。

【考题链接】

We have to find the right p_______________ for the market.

答案：product。

解题思路：此题考查product的拼写，句意为“我们要找出适合市场需要的产品。”故填写product。

[即学即练]

① It’s w_______________ to keep the light on in the bright room.

② Those factories are causing a lot of e____________________ pollution.

③ Our factory produces a kind of new p______________. They are very popular to people.

④ Don’t w_______________ money on junk food.

(二)重点短语

[短语学习]

1. throw away

【用法】“扔掉，抛弃(某物)”

【例句】You should throw away these chairs and buy new ones.

【考查点】短语本意。

【易错点】throw 的过去式和过去分词形式。

【考题链接】

他问我你刚才扔掉了什么。

He asked me what you _______________________ just now.

答案：threw away

解题思路：此题考查throw away的时态，句中“你刚才扔掉了什么”是一个宾语从句，要用陈述句的语序，由表示时间的just now可知要用一般过去时，故填写threw away。

2. instead of

【用法】“代替，而不是”(后接名词，代词和v-ing形式)

【例句】What about eating fish instead of meat today? 今天不吃肉改吃鱼怎么样?

You should go out instead of staying at home. 你应该出去而不是呆在家里。

注意：instead adv. “代替，反而”，单独用时放在句末。

【例句】Why not play football instead?

If you can’t go, let him go instead.

【考查点】instead of的用法。

【易错点】instead of 与rather than易混淆。

辨析：instead of 和rather than的区别：都有“而不是”的意思

instead of：“代替，而不是”，重点词是of，它是介词，所以后接名词，代词和v-ing形式，尤其需注意的是动词该用动名词形式，即v-ing;

rather than：“(是……)而不是……”，它是连词，前后成分在形式上必须保持一致，所以后面的结构应该与前面一样，就有可能出现代词主格，动词的各种形式等，不一而足，但关键是要和与它对比的结构形式一致!

【例句】I’ll go there instead of him.

I rather than he(与I一致)will go there.

Yesterday he walked here instead of driving here.

Yesterday he walked here rather than drove(与walked一致)here.

【考题链接】

有些废品是可循环再利用的，所以我们是卖掉它而不是扔掉。

Some waste is reusable, so we’d better sell it for recycling ________________________.

答案：instead of throwing it away/ rather than throw it away。

解题思路：此题考查“而不是”的翻译，由于“而不是”可译为“instead of”或“rather than”，需要注意它们后面动词的形式，instead of后只能跟动名词，故写为instead of throwing it away;而rather than后的动词要和前面的动词形式保持一致，故写为rather than throw it away。

3. do harm to

【用法】对……造成伤害

do harm to sb./ sth. = do sb./ sth. harm “给某人/某物造成伤害，伤害(某人)，损害(某物)”

do no harm to sb./ sth. 对某人/某物没有造成伤害

九年英语课件篇5

九年级英语6-10单元复习学案

九年级陈香伟

一、教师寄语：Nothing is difficult in the world if you put your heart into it.二、学习目标知识目标:复习掌握这五单元重要的词汇及短语能力目标：能运用这五单元的语法解决实际题目。

德育目标：进一步科学自己的学习方法，提高学习效率。

三、重难点：进一步复习掌握定语从句，被动语态及过去完成时态。

四、学习过程

1.预习：仔细预习本部分内容，找出自己不懂的地方并记下来。

2.导入：We will learn and review Unit6 to Unit 10

3.自主探究：通过查找资料，对本部分的词汇集语法进行那个初步了解。

4.合作探究：与同学探讨不知道的知识。

5.达标练习：

（一）填空题

1．_______(learn)English is very useful in the future.2．Manytrees must _______(plant)in spring..3．You should pay a_______ to your writing.4．F____ of all, you must learn some English words.5．He likes music that has great l___.(二)翻译短语:最有用的发明___________随着跳舞的音乐__________ 到去年末为止_____________一个中国的古代传说____________ 错误地____________推迟做某事______________

（三）翻译句子

（1）我们不能推迟制定计划。

（2）直到1610年茶才被带到西方。

（3）有时我们需要花一些时间来提出一个问题或请求

（四）达标测试

1.Look,how strange!A man can _____(run)after an alien.2.Hurry up, or we ________(not catch)the bus.3.Xiao Ming is afraid of ____(stay)at home alone.4.You look _______(worry).What’s the matter?

5.There must be someone ____(visit)the homes in our neighborhood.6.You can’t wake up a person who is ______(pretend)to be asleep.7.We don’t believe him because he’s _____(honest)

8.I don’t like staying with these children.They are quite__(noise)

9.He pretended______（be）ill yesterday.10.Be_____(care)ofthe dog thatdoesn’tbark.(五)典例分析

1.Reading English ________is very important in learning English.A.too aloudB.too loudC.loudlyD.aloud

【解析].aloud 与loudly都是“大声地”的意思。但loudly 含有“不耐烦’的意思，所以本题应该选D.2.We can do it_______, we will do it well.A.differencesB.differenceC.differentlyD.different

[解析]。本题为副词修饰动词do,所以应选副词形式。故应选C.3.____________(speak)skills are important in learning English

[解析]“口语技巧”应为speaking skills.要注意不要用成spoken skills.（六）中考链接

1.—Would you mind if I sit here?（2008年，四川攀枝花）

—______.it is for the old woman here.A.Never mind.B You’d better notC.of course notD.not at all

2.—Will you please ______ it to me on Friday?（2008年，山东）—What about Saturday? My computer doesn’t work well these days.A.sendB.D:bring

3.___what is the matter, kangkang?(2008年黄冈)

—Oh, I feel very sorry.to hear more than __people lost their lives in the earthquake(地震)in Sichuan.A.sixty thousands ofB.sixty thousandC.sixty thousand ofD.thousand of

七、总结一下自己本节课的收获和不足，请写在下面吧

九年英语课件篇6

Starter Unit1

Good morning!

一、单元教材分析

本单元要求学生掌握英文字母A—H，能认读其印刷体和手写体字母的大小写等四种形式。书写(大写和小写，笔顺，笔画)基本合乎要求。学习一些简单的英文名字，注意区别性别，并为自己取一个英文名字。能看、听、说、唱本单元所列的日常交际用语，重点学会打招呼、相互问候并做到语音语调正确。注意一些字母及日常交际用语的发音，总结元音字母a和e的发音规则。

二、单元学情分析

本单元围绕“问候他人”这一话题，展开听、说、读、写的教学活动。为了创设较为真实的语言环境，首先让学生们认识一些较为简单的英文名字，并让学生们为自己取一个英文名字，让学生们感知、认识英语，并尽快进入英语的环境中。在教学过程中应让学生体会打招呼用语的奥妙所在，做到灵活运用。刚开始学习英语，学生们肯定对学习英语的兴趣非常深厚，教师一定要利用好这一点，让学生在学习英语中能获得乐趣。并逐步让学生们形成稳定的学习兴趣。

三、单元教学建议

采用自主学习、小组合作学习、Role playing、 pair work等方式开展听、说、读、写的学习活动。教师要尽量利用幻灯片、挂图、实物等给学生创造较为真实的英语情景。在教学中创设切实可行的任务型教学活动、突出交际性。引趣激趣策略，创设情景调节气氛，引发激发学生兴趣。教师可以用手势，表情，动作等示意，帮助学生听懂课堂用语和日常交际用语，不讲或少讲汉语。

四、单元课时分配

本单元可用2课时完成教学任务：

(1a-2e) 用1课时

(3a-4d) 用1课时

(1a-2d)

一、教学目标：

1. 语言知识目标：

1) 能掌握以下词汇：字母Aa ~ Hh, good, morning, Good morning!, hi, hello

2) 能掌握以下句型：

① Good morning, Helen!

② Hello, Frank!

③ Hi, Bob!

3) 能理解用英语打招呼的不同说法，并能灵活运用。

4) 能掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。

2. 情感态度价值观目标：

让学生们在相互问候的过程中，学会礼貌待人，与同学之间友好相处。万事开头难，首先利用这个单元培养学生们对英语的兴趣，因为兴趣是的老师。

二、教学重难点

1. 教学重点：

1) 认识一些简单的英文名字，并为自己取一个英文名字。

2) 学习用英语进行见面打招呼，并能体会不同的打招呼用语的奥妙所在，做到灵活运用。

3) 学习掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。

2. 教学难点：

1) 学习掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。

2) 认识一些简单的英文名字，并为自己取一个英文名字。

三、教学过程

Ⅰ. Lead in

Listen to a “Good morning!” song. Then Ss learn to sing this song.

(利用JEFC教材中的Good morning!歌曲导入新课.)

Ⅱ. Presentation

1. Come into the classroom and greet the class with a smile and say Good morning! Now, introduce the words “teacher” and “class” by using gestures. Repeat this several times and have the class repeat after you. Students can answer as a whole group, as rows and as individuals.

T: (By gestures) Teacher; Class

Ss: (Repeat after teacher) Teacher; Class

2. Point to yourself and say I’m Miss/Mr. … Have them repeat. Explain the terms Miss and Mr. in Chinese. Ss repeat this a few times with rows and individuals.

Ss: Miss/ Ms. … (Ss repeat)

Ss: Morning, Miss/Ms. … (Ss repeat)

Ss: Good morning, Ms., Mr. … (Ss repeat)

3. Leave the classroom, return and say Good morning, class! Help the students respond with Good morning, Miss/Mr. … Say Sit down, please. Now let’s start the lesson.

(Practice it several times.)

Ⅲ. Game (Choose an English name.)

1. T: We have many new friends in our class this year. They are from the U.S.A. and England. Who are they? Do you want to know them? Now please look at the screen.

(过大屏幕展示第一页上的彩图，然后再展示单张图片，并分别与名字相对应。)

九年英语课件篇7

一、教学目标：

1. 语言知识目标：

1) 学习掌握下列词汇：cream, workday,pie, show up, bean, market, by the endof,

2)进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。

3)巩固过去完成时的用法

2. 情感态度价值观目标：

1)能运用所掌握的语法，句型和词汇进行交流。

2)能比较流利地讲述自己曾经有的特别的经历。

二、教学重难点

1. 教学重点：

1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。

2) 总结过去完成时的不同句型。

3)总结过去完成时的用法。

2. 教学难点：

过去完成时的用法

三、教学过程

Ⅰ. Revision

1. Have adictationof the new words learned in the last class.

2. Review somemainphrases we learned in the last class. Check the homework.

把下列短语翻译成英语

1. 即将2. 倒杯咖啡

3. 排队等候4. 起床

5. 出去6. 迟到

7. 到时候 8. 闹铃响

9. 开始做某事 10. 搭便车

3. Revision

过去完成时的构成：had+动词的过去分词

II. Lead-in

T: What happenedtoyou on a bad morning?

Ss…

引导学生用过去完成时回答。

III. GrammarFocus.

1. 过去完成时讲解。

2. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。

1)当我到达学校的时候，我才意识到我把书包忘在家里了。

When I gottoschool, I realized I ______ ______ my backpack at home.

2)到我返回学校的时候，铃声已经响过了。

_____ _____ _____Igot back to school, the bell ______ _______.

3)我到达公共汽车站之前，汽车已经离开了。

Before I __________the bus stop, the bus ______ _______ _______.

4)我决定先买一杯咖啡，然后再准备去办公室，

I __________________ go up to my office when I decided to get a coffee first.

5)就在我和别的工作人员一起排队等候的时候，听到了一个巨大的声响。

As I ___________________ ______ with the other office workers, I ______ _____ ___________.

Keys: 1.hadleft 2. By the time , had rung3. got to,had left4. was about to5. waswaiting in line , heard a loud sound

3. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。

4. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。

IV. Try to Find

1. 由when, by the time, before等引导时间状语从句时，若描述发生在过去的事，主句常用过去完成时(had + 过去分词)表示动作发生在过去的过去。

2. be about todo,be doing等表示即将或正在做某事时，常用when引导从句表示突然发生的动作，when可省略。

Ⅴ. Practice

1. Work on 4a.

Ask Ss tomakesentences using by the time or before on their own.

1) Ask fivestudents to the blackboard to writetheir sentences.

1. Tim went intothebathroom. Mary got up.

By the timeMary got up, Tim had already goneinto the bathroom.

2. The coffeebecamecold. I put cream (n. 奶油) in the coffee.

__________________________________

3. Theteachercollected the math homework. I got to school.

__________________________________

4. I completedthework for my boss. The workday (n. 工作日) ended.

__________________________________

5. Themoviestarted. I arrived at the cinema.

__________________________________

6. Mymotherfinished making the apple pie (n. 果馅派). I gothome from my language course.

__________________________________

2) Correcttheir sentences together in class.

2. Work on 4b.

1) Let Ss readthewords or phrases in the box and try to understand the meanings of them.

2) Fill intheblanks with the correct forms of the words by themselves.

1. By the timeIarrived at the party, everyone else_____ already __________.

2. When he putthenoodles into a bowl, he realized he____________ toadd the green beans (n. 豆).

3. By the timemymother came back from the market (n. 市场), I ____ already __________ the door to gofor mypiano lesson.

4. Before she gottothe airport, she _________ ___about the earthquake.

5. Whenshe_________ the movie theater, she _____ remembered she had forgotten to feedherdog.

6. Before she gotachance to say goodbye, he ____________ the building.

3) Correcttheiranswers together.

Work on 4c.

1) Let Ssthink about his/her day yesterday.

2) Let themwrite two true statements and onefalse statement about their day yesterday.

3) Ask theirclassmates to guess the falsestatement.

e.g. 1. By thetimeI left for school in the morning, ___________________________.

2. By the end oftheschool day, _____________________

3. By dinnertime,_____________________________

VI. 如果有时间的话，再做以下练习吧!

用括号里所给词的适当形式填空。

1. When Tim getbackhome, he started to realize that the thief ________ (come) to his house.

2. By the timeIreceived the letter, I ____________ (tell) the content of it.

3. When I wasborn,I _____ (cry) heavily the first time in my life.

1. had come2.hadbeen told3. cried

翻译下列句子：

1.当他到达学校的时候，老师已经开始上课了。

2.当我出来的时候，我爸爸已经离开家了。

3.在我拿书包以前我把门锁上了。

4.在她做完作业之前我妈妈已经回来了。

VII. Homework

1. 复习Grammar Focus 中的内容。Try tomakesentences with before, by the time and be doing … when, and make use of the pastperfect tense.

2. 写作：描述一次难忘的经历。

九年英语课件篇8

一、教学目标：

1. 语言知识目标：

1) 复习被动语态的不同用法。

2) 能够用英语描述一些常用生活用品的制作材料;描述一些熟悉物品的制作过程。

3) 能用就本单元所学习的语法知识及语言材料，就自己所熟悉的话题写一篇小作文。

介绍自己家乡的某个较为著名的艺术品、食物、工商产品等。

2.情感态度价值观目标：

了解一些日常用品的制成材料，增加生活常识，养成良好的生活习惯;了解一些地方知名产品或传统艺术品的制作过程以及制作材料，培养学生的民族自豪感及爱国主义精神。

二、教学重难点

1. 教学重点：

1) 能运用本单元所学的语法及语言材料，完成写作介绍自己熟悉的物品的制件材料及过程。

2)掌握本单元所学被动语态这一语法知识点，并能运用这一知识进行造句。

3)能总结本单元所学的物质材料、及一些艺术品的简单制作过程。

2. 教学难点：

阅读短文，完成写作。

三、教学过程

Ⅰ. Revision

Review themainphrases and sentences.

Ⅱ. Talking

Ask some Sstodescribe how to make a Chinese clay piece.

First, the pieces are carefully shaped by handfrom a very special kind of clayand then allowed to air-dry.

Second, after drying, they are fired at a veryhigh heat.

At last, they are polished and painted.

Ⅲ. Discussion

Talk aboutsomespecial things that your city is famous for.

e.g.

A: What’syour city famous for?

B: Our cityis famous for making lanterns.

A: Really!What are they made of?

B: They’remade of bamboo, silk or paper.

A: What theycan do?

B: They werefirst used for lighting in theold days. Today, they are used at festivals andother celebrations.

A: Why arethey special?

B: Chinesepeople love lanterns very muchbecause they’re symbols of good luck and family reunion(团圆).

Ⅳ. Writing

1. Work on 3a.

What aresomespecial things that your town/ city is famous for? These can be food,artworkor any other products. Discuss them with a partner and take notes.

2. Work on 3b.

Write aparagraphabout the product. Use your notes in 3a.

1. Use thefollowingexpressions to help you:

My town/cityisfamous for…

…is famous in my town/ city.

…is / are made of/ from/ with/ by/ in…

…is / are used for…

…is / are known for…

…is / are special because…

2. 写作指导：

这是一篇科普性说明文，让同学们介绍灯笼的相关情况，语态应为被动语态为主;时态应以一般现在时为主，辅以少量一般过去时态或其他时态的句子。

写作时，应理清自己的写作思路，逐条清晰地进行介绍。比如，可以先介绍灯笼的历史、用途及象征意义。然后介绍人们悬挂灯笼的时间。最后，介绍灯笼的制作材料、产地及其类型。

注意要恰当运用被动语态，检查被动语态句的数、时态以及句子结构等是否正确。

3. Ss try towritedown their answers in the blanks.

4. Walk aroundtheclass give any help Ss may need.

Onepossibleversion:

Lanterns havebeenaround for about 1800 years. They were first used for lighting in the , they are used at festivals and other celebrations. Chinese peoplelove lanternsvery much because they’re symbols of good luck andfamily reunion.

From SpringFestivalto Lantern Festival, lanterns are hung up everywhere. Lanterns wereusually madeof bamboo and paper in the old days. Now they are made of manykinds ofmaterials, such as steel, silk, cloth, plastic and so on. They aremade allround China. Lanterns are made in the shape of different animals,vegetables,fruits and many other things.

Ⅴ. Self Check

Work on SelfCheck1.

1. List somethingsyou use every day. Write down what they are made of/from and where theyweremade?

2. Let Ssdiscusswith their partners. Try to fill in the blanks.

If necessary, Sscanreview the things in Section A and B.

Work on SelfCheck2.

1. Tell Ss tomaketrue sentences with the information in Self check 1.

2. Give Ssoneexample:

My pencil is madeofwood and it was made in Shanghai.

Ss try to maketheirown sentences.

3. Exchangetheirsentences and check if there’s any mistake.

Work on SelfCheck3.

Make sure Ssknowwhat they should do.

T: Completethesentences using the correct forms of the words in brackets.

Ⅵ. Exercise

Ⅰ. Complete the sentences.

1. 皮革是动物的皮做的。

Leather ______________ the skin of animals.

2. 这个小镇以其手工艺品而广为人知。

The small town__________ _____ for its handicraft products.

3. 茶叶被手工采摘，然后送去加工。

The leaves forteaplants are picked by hand and then _____ ____ for _________.

4. 无论你做什么，都要尽力去做。

___________________ you do, you must do it with great efforts.

5. 国际风筝节每年在潍坊举行一次。

The ___________kitefestival ____ ______ in Weifang every year.

6. 据新闻报道，纽约州昨晚下了大雪。

________ ____thenews report, it snowed heavily in New York last night.

7. 饭桌上铺着一层塑料台布。

The table____________ _______ a plastic table clothes.

8. 大意驾驶酿成很多交通事故。

Careless_________causes many ________ ___________ .

Keys: 1. ismade of2. is famous for3. aresent, processing

4. No matterwhat5. international, is held6.According to

7. iscovered with8. driving, trafficaccidents

Ⅱ. Finish the sentences.

1. Inspring, we can see green ______ (leaf)and grass everywhere.

2. The Internetis______ (wide) used in most families in our country today.

3. English________(speak) by many people in the world.

4. The companyhopes____ (it) product will be successful on the European market.

5. My teacherdidwhat he could to make his class ______ (live).

6. If thetraffic_____ (be not) heavy, it’ll take us an hour to getthere.

7. They spentonepart of their holiday in _____ (French) and the other in England.

8. Bell is______(know) for inventing the telephone.

9. The Chineseuse_________ (chopstick) instead of knives and forks.

Keys: leaves,widely, is broken, its, lively,isn’t, France, known,chopsticks

Homework

上网搜索你所喜欢的中国传统工艺品相关情况，用所学的句子写一个报告。

新目标课件12篇

每个老师为了上好课需要写教案课件，需要大家认真编写每份教案课件。学生反应可以帮助教师做出更有效的课堂管理决策，优质教案课件是怎么写成的？幼儿教师教育网小编阅读了很多文章但是“新目标课件”真的是精品之作，相信你参阅以后一定会有所收获！

新目标课件(篇1)

新目标英语九年级第八单元短语动词小结

常见短语动词结构有下面几种：

1.动词+副词如：give up 放弃 turn off 关掉 stay up 熬夜

这种结构有时相当于及物动词，如果其宾语是代词，就必须放在动词和副词之间，如果是名词，则既可插在动

词和副词之间，也可放在短语动词后。2.动词+介词如：listen of 听 look at 看 belong to 属于这种结构相当于及物动词，后面跟宾语。

3.动词+副词+介词如：come up with 提出，想出 run out of 用完，耗尽

4.动词+名词(介词)如：take part in参加 catch hold of 抓住 1.cheer(sb.)up使(某人)高兴、振作如：cheer me up 使我高兴 clean up 打扫 clean-up n.打扫

2.homeless adj.无家可归的 a homeless boy 一个无家可归的男孩

home n.家

3.hand out 分发 hand out bananas give out 分发 give out sth to sb.分….给某人

give up doing 放弃… give up smoking 放弃吸烟

give away 赠送捐赠 give away sth.to ….give away money to kids

give sb.sth.给某人某东西 give me money 给我钱

give sth.to sb.给某人某东西 give money to me 给我线 4.sick adj.生病的作表语、定语 ill adj.生病的作表语，不能作定语

5.volunteer to do v.志愿效劳、主动贡献 volunteer n.志愿者

e up with 提出想出 === think up 想出

catch up with 赶上追上

7.put off doing 推迟做某事

put on 穿上(指过程)put up 张贴

8.write down 写下记下

9.call up 打电话

make a telephone call 打电话

10.set up 成立建立

The new hospital was set up in 2000.这座医院是在2000年成立的。11.each 每个各自的强调第一个人或事物的个别情况常与of 连用

every 每个每一个的一切的则有“全体”的意思不能与of 连用

12.put …to use 把… 投入使用，利用

They put the new machine to use.他们把新机器投入使用

13.help sb.(to)do 帮助某人做某事 help him(to)study help sb.with sth.帮助某人做某事 help him with English help do 帮助做某事 help study 14.plan to do 计划做某事

plan + 从句

I plan to go to Beijing.=== I plan(that)I will go to Beijing.我计划去北京。15.spend … doing 花费…做… I spent a day visiting Beijing.我花了一天的时间去参观北京。

spend… on sth.花费…在… I spent 3 years on English.16.not only … but(also)… 不但… 而且… 用来连接两个并列的成分

(1)引导以 not only …but(also)… 开头的句子往往引起部分倒装。

因此 ⑴Not only do I feel good but(also)….是倒装句。

也是说得要把前面的句子中的助动词或者是情态动词放在主语的前面。如：

①Not only can I do it but(also)I can do best.我不仅能做到而且做得最好。

⑵Not only…but(also)… 接两主语时，谓语动词随后面的主语人称和

数的变化也就是就近原则如：

①Not only Lily but(also)you like cat.不仅莉莉而且你也喜欢猫。

②Not only you but(also)Lily likes cat.不仅你而且莉莉喜欢猫。常见的就近原则的结构有：

Neither… nor…即不…也不…(两者都不)Neither you nor I like him.我和你都不喜欢他。

Either… or… 不是…就是…(两者中的一个)Either Lily or you are a student.Not only …but(also)…

There be 17.join 参加(指参加团体、组织)如：join the Party 入党

take part in 参加(指参加活动)如： take part in sports meeting 参加运动会 18.①run out of == use up 用完用尽

I have run out of money.== I have used up money.我已经用完了钱。

②run away 逃跑 The monkey has run away from the zoo.这只猴子已经从动物园里逃跑了。

③run to + 地方跑到某地

19.take after(在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像

be similar to 与..相像

take after 相像

look after 照顾

take care of 照顾 out 算出结局

The situation worked out quite well.情况的结局非常好 Have you worked out this math problem? 你已经算出这道数学问题了吗？ 21.hang out 闲荡闲逛

I like to hang out at mall with my friends.我喜欢和我的朋友一起去购物中心闲荡。22.be able to do 能会

be unable to do 不能不会

23.thank you for doing 谢谢做某事如： thank you for helping me 谢谢做帮助我

新目标课件(篇2)

How much are these pants? 新目标七上教案及同步练习

教学目标与要求一、串记口诀颜色词 blue蓝grey灰，white白的像雪堆。 yellow黄green绿，red红的似血迹。 orange橙purple紫，black黑的如墨汁。 brown棕褐色，color颜色记仔细。二、学习目标本单元的核心内容是“购物”，该单元围绕这一核心内容设计安排听、说、读、写。要求掌握有关“购物”的日常交际用语。围绕Shopping这一话题，进行归纳总结，自编对话，进行表演。复习巩固动词like和have的一般现在时的用法。三、能力目标 1．表演对话及看图说话的能力。 2．就How much句型进行数量方面的交际问答的能力。 3．继续培养听的技能，逐渐掌握听的技巧。 4．运用拼读规则学习词汇的能力，逐步学会查字典的能力。课文重点与难点一、单词导航台 1．dollar n. 美元 2．much adj. (more, most)大量的，许多的(修饰不可数名词)：It won’t take much time.那不会花太多时间的。You take too much interest in what you wear. 你太过于关心穿着了。 pron. 许多，大量：Do you see much of her? 你经常见到她吗？ adv. 很，非常：Thank you very much. 多谢。 3．shoe n. 鞋，鞋子：a pair of shoes一双鞋【引申】Over shoes，over boots.一不做，二不休；shoe polish鞋油；shoeblack擦鞋匠；shoelace鞋带。 4．sock n. 短袜：a pair of socks一双袜子 5．sweater/′swet/ n. 套头衫，运动衣 6．take/teik/ v. ①拿走，带走；②做(和名词连用，表示与该名词意义相关的动作)：take a photo摄影，take a look看一看；③花费(时间，金钱):It took me a lot of money to buy the house. 买这幢房子花了我很多钱。④吃喝，服用：take food/medicine；⑤乘车(船)：take a train/a boat/a bus坐火车/船/公共汽车。 7．thirty num. 三十 8．Twenty/′twenti/ num. 二十 9．welcome n. } v. 欢迎，迎接【考点】You are welcome. 别客气。Welcome sb. 欢迎某人。二、句子破译站 1．How much is this T-shirt? 这件T恤多少钱？ How much are these socks? 这些短袜多少钱？ ⑴how much多少钱，用来询问价格。若所询问的东西是不可数名词或可数名词的单数时，谓语用is；所询问的东西是可数名词复数或不止一种东西时，谓语用are。如： How much is the rice? 这大米多少钱？ How much are the potatoes? 这些土豆多少钱？ How much are these things? 这些东西多少钱？ ⑵how much多少，用来提问数量，后面加不可数名词。如： How much water is there in the bottle? 瓶子里有多少水？注：how many也用于提问数量的多少，但后面必须加可数名词的复数。请比较： How many pears do you want? 你想要多少梨？ How much meat do you want? 你想要多少肉？ 2. Can I help you? 你想要点什么？ Can I help you?和 Let me help you.是当人们询问别人是否需要服务时或想要提供帮助时的常用语，两者都表示愿意或主动向别人提供帮助，意思为“要我帮忙吗？”“让我帮帮你。”需注意的是“Can I help you?”在不同的场合有不同的译法，如：售货员对顾客说时，可译为“您想要买点什么？”；在图书馆，图书管理员对你说时，可译为“您要借书吗？” 表示提供帮助的其他一些英语句式还有： What can I do for you? (需要帮忙吗？) Could I help you? (要我帮忙吗？) May I help you?(要我帮忙吗？) 后两句比Can I help you? 在语气上更加客气和委婉。 3. What color do you want? 你想要什么颜色？ Want是及物动词，后面加名词作宾语，此句中宾语为what color，译为“想要……颜色”。如： I want a blue sweater我想要一件蓝色汗衫。 4. I’ll take it. 我要了。/我买了。 ⑴I’ll是I will的缩写形式，will是助动词，在句中没有实际意义，与动词take连用表示将要发生的动作。语法上称它为一般将来时。如： We’ll go to school tomorrow. 我们明天要去上学。 ⑵take=buy，是“买下”的意思。在口语中，当表示买下某物时经常用take，而很少用buy。如： The bike is very nice, I’ll take it. 这辆自行车很漂亮，我买下了。 You can’t take it, it’s too dear. 你别买它，它太贵了。 5. ―Thank you. 谢谢。 ―You are welcome. 不客气。 Thanks. Thank you. Thank you very much.以上三句都是表示感谢时广泛使用的礼节性语言。其中，Thanks是一个名词，其含义相当于Thank you，但不可以说Thanks you。也可以用Thanks(a lot). /Many thanks. 回答时，不能依据汉语“不用谢”直译为No thanks.或Don’t thank me. 而应该说：That’s OK. That’s all right. You’re welcome./Not at all. 等。如： ―Jim, is this your cup? 吉姆，这是你的.茶杯吗？ ―Oh, yes, it is. 呦，不错，是我的。 ―Here you are. 给你。 ―Thank you. 谢谢你。 ―You’re welcome. 不客气。 6. Do you need bags for sports or school? 你需要运动包或书包吗？ ⑴这是一个选择疑问句。提供两种或两种以上的情况，问对方选择哪一种的疑问句，叫做选择疑问句。这种问句应选择其中一种情况来回答。选择疑问句的构成方式是：一般疑问句＋or＋一般疑问句。在实际应用中，后面的一般疑问句常常省略与前面一般疑问句相同的部分。or连接两个并列成分，即两个成分是相同的词性。朗读时or前面的成分用升调，or后面的成分用降调。如： ①Is the cat black or white? 那猫是黑色的还是白色的？(连接两个形容词) ②Is this your bag or her bag? 这是你的包还是她的包？(连接两个名词) ③Is Bill in or out? 比尔在家还是没在家？(连接两个副词) ④Is it a pen, a pencil or a ball-point pen? 它是钢笔，铅笔还是圆珠笔？(连接三个名词) ⑵need译为“需要”在此句中作实意动词，故其一般疑问句的形式是将助动词do置于句首。它还可做情态动词用。如： You needn’t come here. 你不用来这里。 ⑶or后面省略了bags，即bags for sports or for school，也可说成sports bags or schoolbags。介词for表示对象，用途等，意思是“为……”。如： These apples are for you. 这些苹果是给你的。 7．We have sweaters in all colors at ￥50 each. 我们出售各色汗衫，每件仅售50元。 ⑴注意本句介词in与at的用法。in有多种含义，如：in English用英语，in a room在房间里；它还可与表示颜色的名词连用，如：a girl in red穿红衣服的女孩。介词at也有多种含义，如： at six(在六点) at the station(在车站)；此处后加￥50表示价格，at ￥50相当于at the price of ￥50。 ⑵￥50读作fifty yuan，fifty yuan中的yuan是人民币“元”的汉语拼音，在英语中表示人民币单位缩写为￥。虽然fifty yuan五十元看起来是复数，但由于yuan被看作不可数名词，所以yuan后面不能加“s”构成复数。yuan是不可数名词，作主语时动词用单数。如： Fifty yuan is cheap for this sweater. ⑶句末的each为副词，意为“每，各”。如： The tickets are ￡1 each. 入场券每张一英磅。它还可作代词用，如： Each of his sisters is very beautiful.他的每一个姐姐都非常美丽。 8．Have a look at Zig Zag’s Clothes shop. 欢迎光顾Zig Zag衣物店。 ⑴动词短语have/take a look at sth. 意为“看一看”，此处look作名词用，如： Please have a look at my picture. 请看一下我的照片。此句也可以说： Please look at my picture. 这里Look作动词用。但have a look要比look更自然些，时间有时更短些， go and have a look要比go and look自然得多，因此一般不说 go and look，have a look后面也可以接at介词短语，表示看一看某物。类似的动词短语还有很多。如： have a drink喝一口，相当于drink喝。have a walk散散步，相当于walk散步。如： ①Can I have a look at this map? =Can I look at thia map? 我可以看这幅地图吗？ ②Let me have a drink. =Let me drink. 让我喝一口。 ③Let’s have a walk. =Let’s walk. 我们去散步吧。 ④Let’s go and have a look at his new house. 我们去看看他的新房子吧。 ⑵Zig Zag’s Clothes shop 为专有名词，是商店名称，故首字母大写。英语里姓名＋所有格通常表示场所，如： He often visits the Green’s. 他经常拜访格林一家。 He often goes to the Charlie’s for his stomachache(胃痛)。他经常去查理诊所看胃痛。 9.Here you are. 给你 Here you are. 是一个习惯句型，用以向对方展示其所需要的东西，意思是“给你”；不能按照一般顺序写作You are here。因为后者的意思是“你在这儿”。类似的表达结构还有： Here it is. Here they are. 如： Excuse me. Is this your book? 请问，这是你的书吗？ Yes, it is. 是的。 Here you are. 给你。 Thank you. 谢谢。同学借你的词典，你给他时可说：“Here you are.”。你在商店买了一支铅笔，服务员递上铅笔时可说：“ Here you are.”或“Here it is.”；若买了两支或多支时，可说：“ Here they are.”。三、工具箱 1.基数词表示“多少”的词叫做基数词。如one(1)，two(2)，three(3)，thirteen（13），twenty（20）等。 100以下的基数词 1 one 2 two 3 three 4 four 5 five 6 six 7 seven 8 eight 9 nine 10 ten 11 eleven 12 twelve 13 thirteen 14 fourteen 15 fifteen 16 sixteen 17 seventeen 18 eighteen 19 nineteen 20 twenty 30 thirty 40 forty 50 fifty 60 sixty 70 seventy 80 eighty 90 ninty 100 a hundred 21 twenty-one 25 twenty-five 58 fifty-eight 说明：(1)13～19均以后缀Cteen结

新目标课件(篇3)

新目标英语八年级上册Unit 5 教学设计

一，教学目标：（1）知识目标：

通过本单元的学习让学生掌握有关发出邀请和请求许可的的用语。学习委婉地有礼貌的拒绝邀请及合理的解释，谈论自己或别人必须做的事情；学会根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动。并学会制作邀请及及训练对回复邀请函的书面表达。（2）能力目标：

学会礼貌的发出，接受，拒绝邀请；谈论自己和别人必须做的事情；学会根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动。

二，教学重点及难点：

重点：

本课的重点词汇短语：study for a test, go to the doctor, have a piano lesson, help my parents, visit my anut, thanks a lot for sth, have to culture club及时间短语；on Saturday afternoon，the day after tomorrow，the whole day等。

重点句型：can开头发出邀请的一般疑问句，和接受及拒绝的答句。Sure,I’d love to, sorry,I can’t, thank you for your invitation/asking, sorry I have to… 及用现在进行时表示将来计划或行动

难点：目标词汇和句型在实际情况中的运用。

三，教学方法：

任务教学法为主体，以小组活动，游戏，听力，动手练习和笔头练习为载体展开教学。

四，教学安排：4课时。

SectionA The 1st period 一，新课导入（cead-in）1，用unit3 What are you doing for vacation?来提问，这样既可复习旧的句型，也可以图片呈现方式引处新的短语：study for a test, go to the doctor, have a piano lesson, help my parents, visit my aunt.2，下对全体同学：Halloween is coming ,I will have a party, can you come to my party?启发学生基础。

Students: Sure ,I’d love to.和I’m sorry I have to go to the doctor 以及Sorry, I can’t, I am studying for a test.etc.3，小组操练，就上述导入的新句型反复操练，进行强调及反复练习。并鼓励学生，发挥自己想象力，根据自己的实际情况创立真实的情境练习发出邀请，及接受或拒绝邀请。4，听力练习，完成1B，再让学生复述听力原文。

5，Guess game

Can you guess why? 准备一些遮住一部分的图片，然后逐步露出图片，让学生猜：

T :I invited come of my friend to my birthday party, but they have some plans, so they can’t come to my party, Can you guess why? Keys:Can he come to my party?No,he can’t ,He has to go to the movies.Etc He is playing soccer on starday? 这一部分即使一个猜图片的游戏，也是对Can引导的一般疑问句和have to及用现在进行时表示将来计划或行动的练习。6，导入听力，完成P26-2a,2b，Can jeff/many/may/claudia/poul come to the party? 7，pairwork(张靓颖本周来葫芦岛开演唱会，你有两张票，邀请你的同学和你一块去)

A:Can you go to the concert whit me?

操作建议：

1，学生两人一组结对活动，一个学生询问同伴是否愿意和自己一块去音乐会，另一学生接受或拒绝邀请，如拒绝给出理由。

2，学生与其他人在结对活动，直到找到同伴一块去为止。8，小结。

SactionB The 2nd period 一，导入新课

展示一份教室课前准备的未来一周的日程安排。

并向学生介绍一周安排（如P27 4表格）二，设计日程表

Task：学生独立设计假期某一周的日程安排，再设计过程中要尽可能合理安排好学习，休息，娱乐等各项活动，并留有一些空闲时间。

注意事项：

1，学生独立设计的日程表活动要丰富，设计要合理，同时留有一些空间随时安排活动。

3，学生之间相互展示自己的日程安排表，选出最好的。完成任务所需要的语言结构：

Go to the piano lesson at 9:00 am.Visit my grand ma at 3:00 pm.Go to the concert in the evening.Watch a football game in the afternoon.三，教师呈现课前准备的几分邀请卡并教会学生阅读邀请卡，并设计几个问题，提问学生完成。以此为契机，讲解应用阅读理解的解题思路及方法。并选择一到两篇相应的应用文阅读理解，限时完成。为进一步提高阅读能力奠定基础。并完成P27-3a。

四，写邀请卡，注意邀请信的写作格式。

1)每个学生设想一项自己打算举办的活动。

2)学生根据设计的活动，要说明活动举办的时间，地点，五，发出邀请卡。

此活动为全班活动，学生向其他同学发出邀请，收到邀请卡的其他同学对照自己的日程表安排，接受或拒绝邀请。

六，写作训练。

发出邀请卡的同学个写一份小结报告，一共有多少同学参加，不能参加的同学理由是什么？

此项任务，是本课的一个拓展与延伸环节，也是本课知识的一个生成。

七，让学生宣读自己的小结报告，作为本课知识学习的成果展示。

Saction The 3rd period 一，导入新课。

P29 3a 听力形式呈现，听后回答问题。

What is Sonia’s doing on Monday—Friday?

二，3a语言点，及回复信的格式及书写要求为下一环节做铺垫。

Thank you for doing sth.Have tennis training.On Friday evening etc.三，完成3b P29

四，书面表达训练。

操作建议：

1，上一节课学生制作的一周的日程安排表和接受到的邀请函为依据。

2，3a为范文，写一篇不少于80词的短文。

3，并挑选2篇不同层次的书面表达进行全班评讲，并给出等级，以此达到训练的目的。

五，Homework(给一定信息写一篇回复信)你的好朋友Anna邀请你去看演唱会，你不能去，原因如下： 1，你将为周一的物理考试做准备。

2，如果上周去了大连旅游，你妈妈要安排你本周去她家浇花。3，周日全家去东湖野营。

4，下周有一部精彩电影上映邀请他一同去，并说出见面的具体时间和地点。

The fourth period 一，导入新课（lead-in）（准备一份台历）

（完成Scation B 1a）What’s the date today? What was the date yesterday? What day is it today?(tomorrow, the day after fromm并引出What’s today、It’s nonday the 14th

二，listening 完成P28 2a 2b 三，pairwork 引导学生根据2A录音内容，分小组展开课堂Pairwork对话及交流活动，培养口语能力，完成2C内容。

三，完成p30 slef cheak

并用Play soccer come to… have to 口头操练，以此夯实基础。

四，1，完成P30 2 当堂评讲，2，补充练习题《中学生英语》P30 1-10

新目标课件(篇4)

新目标英语八年级上Unit5教案

一、教学目标： 1.语言知识目标：

1)能掌握以下单词：sitcom, news, soap, educational, plan, hope, find out, discussion, stand, happen, may, expect 能掌握以下句型：

① What do you want to watch? ② What do you think of talk shows? ③ I can’t stand them.④ I don’t mind them.⑤ I like/love them./ I don’t like them.2)能了解以下语法：

动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。3）学会陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。2.情感态度价值观目标：

学会谈论流行文化，了解各类电视和电视节目的名称和自己的喜欢。注意引导学生们形成正确的文化观念，大力培养学生们的跨文化意义，形成自己独立的个性。

二、教学重难点 1.教学重点：

1)学习掌握各类电视和电视节目的名称。

2)掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。

2.教学难点：

掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。

三、教学过程 Step 1 Lead-in 学生们根据图片提示学习各类电视节目并且练习运用What do you think of…? Step 2 New words Learn the names of the TV shows.Step 3 Game 1.引导学生们看1a中的图片，根据提示依次说出每一部TV Show的名称。2.让学生们看图片及1a中的词汇，将图片与正确的词汇相连。3.Check the answers with the Ss.Step 4 Listening 1.T: Tell Ss to read the shows in the box.Make sure they know the meaning of the shows.2.Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the shows1-4.3.Play the recording again.Check the answers with the Ss.Step 5 Pair work 1.Let Ss look at the pictures in the box.Then explain the meaning of each expression to the Ss.2.Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher.Then let Ss make their own conversation using the shows and expressions in the box.3.Let some pairs ask and answer about the shows.Step 6 Listening Work on 2a: 1.Read the shows in the box of 2a.Tell Ss to remember the information.2.Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the TV shows [1-5].3.Play the recording again to check the on 2b: 1.Let Ss read the sentences below.Explain some main sentences for the Ss.Make sure they know what to do.2.Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct words in the blanks.3.Play the recording again to check the answers.Step 7 Pair work 1.Tell Ss ask and answer questions about the TV shows in 2a.They can use the information that is true for them.2.Let Ss read conversation after the teacher.3.Explain some main points for the Ss.4.Ss act the conversation in pairs.Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.

新目标课件(篇5)

【教材分析】

本模块以出行旅游为话题。对话是通过读地图来呈现指路及表明具体位置的语言表达方式。通过本单元的听说活动，给学生提供充足的体验和运用语言的机会。

【学情分析】

学生具有一定的英语基础，学习热情高，表现欲强，能积极参与到课堂中。而且相互之间能够很好地利用小组进行合作交流。

【教学目标】

Knowledge objective:

To master some words and expressions about places, positions and giving directions.Ability objective:

1.To ask the way and give directions.2.To understand a conversation of giving directions.Moral objective:

1.To be polite to others.2.To be ready to help others.3.To know more about Beijing and love Beijing.【教学重点】

1.To learn some words and expressions about places：

Bank, museum, along, across, cross, opposite, tourist, excuse, excuse me, street ,turn, third, guidebook, bookshop, right, why not ?? could, underground

2.To learn and review some words about positions: near,opposite, along, on the left/right, across.3.To learn some expressions about asking ways and giving directions:

【教学难点】

1.To get information from the conversation.2.To ask the way and give directions.【教学方法】

PWP method, task-based method and interactive approach.【教学手段】

A tape recorder, multimedia ,PPT courseware, the teaching CD and some pictures.【教学过程】 Teaching Procedures:

Step 1 Revision【复习】

1、listen to an English song.Aim : to activate the classroom atmosphere.2、Do a duty :

Aim :To give one student a chance to train his spoken Englishin every class.3、Talking and acting:

Aim :to check if the students can practice the topic of the last

module and to develop the students’speaking and language expressing abilities.Step 2 Leading in

【导入】

1、Play a guessing game: The teachers shows the pictures ofnew words and let the students say as quickly as possible.Ai : to check if the students preview the new lesson before the class and to be familiar with them.2、Look, think and say: the teacher shows some pictures aboutgiving directions and some road signs and asks the students to think and say the phrases.Aim :to consolidate the phrases about giving directions.3、Find and say.The teacher shows pictures of direction prepositions, and the students find the right words and make some sentences with the direction prepositons.Aim : to understand and master the usage of the directionprepositions.【总结】

1.Do some exercises about the direction prepositions。2.Do some exercises about the patterns of asking for and giving directions.

新目标课件(篇6)

1、学习字词句，使学生受到识字、写字、画画、说话的训练．

2、读读背诵，积累成语与诗句．

3、学写铅笔字．认识先里头后封口的笔顺规则．

4、口语交际训练，训练学生学会做客，培养人际交往的能力．

1、巩固所学的生字，并能用生字说话。

词成句的训练。

2、熟记成语，朗读诗歌。

2、这些都是古代人写的字，有没有发现这些字有什么点？

3、那么，随着时间的推进，象形字慢慢演变成我们学的字。能把这些象形字相应的汉字写出来吗？

4、评比，谁写得又正确又美观？

5、这么多的景物，你能将这些象形字变为一幅美丽的风景画并介绍给大家吗？四人一组分工合作，看谁画得最美，说得最好。四人相互商量．

7、评选最佳图画．同时将学生的画贴在黑板上。

（1）小蚂蚁为什么要在炎热的夏天就背过冬的粮食呢？

（2）为什么在窗户上钉栅栏呢？

（3）为什么人们要忙着修筑水坝呢？

会有什么危险了，我们可以用这四个成语概括图上的意思。

3、自读成语，读准字音。

4、说说你对这些成语的意思的理解．

7、读诗，看看图，想想诗句的意思，还有什么不懂的地方？

8、生互相交流。

9、指导有感情朗读，读出捕鱼的危险和对渔夫的同情。

1、能学写铅笔字，认识先里头后封口的笔顺规则．

2、口语交际训练，培养学生人际交往的能力．

1、审题．

2、指导。

（1）复习，出示；同、向、扁．

说说这3个字的笔顺规则，并按规则每人写一个字。

问：这样全包围的字，该怎样写呢？笔顺规则是什么？

（3）师范写“月”。

3、练习。

（1）生练习书写“日”，体会所写的笔顺规则。

（2）以此规则类推到“四、田”上，请学生板书这两个字的笔顺。

（3）其他学生仿照练习。

（4）师巡视指导。

4、反馈。

（1）展示写得好的学生作业，提出表扬。

（2）共同存在的问题给予提出，井指导学生进行矫正性练习。

2、到别人家做客，在门口该怎样做？见到主人该怎样说？

受到主人的招待该怎样说？跟主人告别时该怎样说？

4、你能连起来说说吗？

自由说、同座位互说、指名说。

5、自由组合来表演“做客”。

6、评选取最好的组合。

教学后记：学生学会怎样做一个好客人，怎样做一个好客的人。

新目标课件(篇7)

青铜峡第五中学王俊霞

教材分析

1、教学内容

1)、词汇：have，soccer，ball，tennis racket，ping-pong ball，volleyball，basketball sport，bat，2)、语言结构：A、Do you have a ping-pong ball？Yes，I do。Do you have a ping-pong bat？Not，I do not。Does she/he have a pen？Yes，she/he does

2、教材的地位及其作用

本单元的教学主要内容是：学习have的一般现在时的疑问式的肯定和否定回答，该话题与学生的日常生活紧密联系在一起，容易唤起学生的学习兴趣，这对于提高学生的综合能力很有帮助，特别是说的能力。

本单元仍在继续学习一般现在时，这是一个生活中离不开的时态，也是最基本的一个时态。新课程标准要求学生重点掌握一般现在时，这在英语中使用频率很高，学好这一时态的用法对以后其他时态的学习和交际有很大的帮助。

二、学生分析

学生现有的能力与已掌握的知识：

学生在已经学过词汇：What is this ？ What is that？句型： Where is„? It’s in / on / under/„

经过前面的学习学生已经积累了一定的词汇，掌握了一定的目标语，已经具备了一定的听说读写能力。

三、教学目标

1、语言知识

词汇：A、重点掌握表示有关各种运动球类的名词, 如basketball, soccerball，so on 重点句型：? Do you／they have a TV? Yes，I／they do．／No，I／they don’t.Does he／she have a soccer ball? Yes，he／she does．／No，he／she doesn’t.2、语言技能

1）、能看着图片说；Do you／they have a TV? Yes，I／they do．／No，I／they don’t.Does he／she have a soccer ball? Yes，he／she does．／No，he／she doesn’t.3、学习策略

1）、利用老师所提供的图片卡片做出简单的判断。

2）、通过与同学交流，学会使用一般现在时的疑问形式及肯定和否定回答。

4、情感态度

1）通过各小组的对话练习培养学生的合作精神； 2）通过学习本单元，教会学生之间互相有无的主要句式

重点难点

1、Have 的一般现在时的疑问式用法;

2、Have的一般现在时的疑问句，及其肯定，否定回答;

3、简单拓展主语第三人称单数的句型。

教学手段：采用最简单的卡片图片、课本以及肢体语言。理念与思路、教法

1）采用图片进行直观教学。

2）学生在课堂教学过程中口头训练应成为本单元教学的重点内容。教学突破：Section A重在通过使用动词have对物品的所属进行提问和回答的交流式口语活动，学习由助动词do或does引导的一般疑问句的构成以及回答。教师要善于引导学生比较行为动词的疑问句和be动词的疑问句在构成和回答上的区别，通过大量和反复地操练以达到运用自如。

四、教学流程

一、第一教学环节：情景创设，导入新课教师活动学生活动

Section A主要内容是通过使用have对物品的所属进行提问和应答，来学会使用do和does引导的一般疑问句。所以在教学中可采取问答式导人法：

掌握新单词.采用各种方法学习单词。

1、升降语调、拼读、接龙和肢体的方式记忆单词。2．检查学生记忆单词的成效。

3、学生看1a的图片,使字母和单词相对应。

第二教学环节；老师和学生互动：学习掌握重要内容。

教师活动学生活动（看图片练句型）

分片进行演示：I have a footba11．Do I have a football? 自己回答：Yes，I d0．再问：Do I have a basketball? 自己回答：No，I don’t．再使用其它物体和图片询问学生：Do I have„? 询问学生：Do you have„? 询问学生：„? 询问学生：Do they have„? 在学生充分掌握的第一，第二人称和第三人称的复数。

2．学生回答：Yes，you do．，you don’t．学生回答：Yes，I do．No，I don’t．学生回答：Yes，he／she does．No，he／she doesn’t．学生回答：Yes, they do．No，they don’t．掌握它的肯定和否定回答。

3、要求学生完成1b的听力，达到教学应完成的任务。

4．引导学生展开Pairwork活动，完成lc部分口语交际的教学任务，学会运用助动词do进行问答，可采用师生互动带动学生互动的交流方式：

5．Pairwork活动，完成lc部分口语交际的学习任务，学会运用助动词do进行问答并上台展示口语交际。

三、第三教学环节：合作交流，巩固提高

教师活动学生活动

1、学生巩固练习活动，完成课堂练习和总结及笔头练习的教学任务。

2、让总结本课的主要内容，如果不周到，教师可以补充完成。

3、游戏：让一个学生在课前作各种动作，其他学生跟根据他的动作写单词和句型，然后核对结果。这种活动既可练习have一般疑问句的构成和回答的写法，又能调动学生的学习兴趣，十分有效。

4、习题练习，巩固课堂。问题探究与拓展活动

动词的第三人称单数形式：当句子的主语是“第三人称单数”时，即：不是I，不是you的其它单数形式时，谓语动词必须改变形式，也就是在词尾加一s或一es(同名词的复数形式)，我们可以简称为“三单形式”。有些动词的变化是特殊的，如：have的三单形式是has。在构成否定句时。要在动词前加助动词don’t或doesn’t；在构成疑问句时，则要在主语前加上助动词do或does，does／doesn’t是do／don’t的第三人称单数形式。助动词后应该用动词的原型。

五、教学反思：（成功和不足）

本单元重点学习的语法是do 和 does 引导的一般疑问句以及它们的回答方式，与此同时学习与运动有关的一些词汇。为此，在本单元我运用不同形式鼓励学生使用目标语言，在任务中体现学生的主体地位。在过程中学生可能出现一些错误，本人就以积极的态度对待他们，愉快的氛围对学生的学习有很大的积极影响力。首先要调动学生的学习兴趣和积极性，我努力在这方面去做，不足的请各位多提宝贵意见。

教无定法，教师不要为了任务活动而忽略了语言的传授。学生的信息交流要在特定的环境中进行，给他们参与的机会。任务的完成不是语言学习的结束，而是另一个高度的开端。加强学生语言的实践是改革的关键，要给学生机会去说、去做、去思考。

新目标英语上册/Unit 1 My name's Gina 教学目标

1、学会询问周围新同学的姓名，并且将自己刚认识的好朋友介绍给全体同学。

2、通过学生制作名卡或桌卡来提高学生学习英语的兴趣，体现英语的实用性。

3、通过以上任务活动，掌握形容词性物主代词的用法及其与人称代词的主格的区别，并且在第一节课让学生对英语的学习产生兴趣。

4、德育目标：热爱班集体，团结同学。

教学重点和难点

1、形容词性物主代词的用法

2、在任务活动中掌握you和your，he和his, she和her 的用法

3、重点句型(斜体字为扩展句子)：

Hi / Hello!Good morning / afternoon / evening.How are you? Fine, thank you!/ Very well / So-so /All right.What’s your name? My name is … / I’m … What’s his/ her name? His/Her name is … 课前准备

1、学生课前准备：

利用网络查阅中英文姓名及初次见面时各国或各地风俗，礼仪体会它们的不同之处；

准备硬纸片和水彩笔；

用英文介绍自己的姓、名。

2、教学器材：录音机、电脑、图片。

3、教学课件：中英文名字展示片。

教学设计

Tasks Students’ activities Teacher’s activities

1.Game: ask and answer the question: What’s your name? Students make a self-introduction and pass the sentences one by one.At first, teacher makes a self-introduction.2.Two students act out how to greet people.Act out the greeting forms they are familiar with or they find on the students the pictures of other countries’ customs with computer.3.See who can make the most friends and get the most information.Then report their results with his or hers.Move around to make friends with the ones they are interested in.Make the students move around to make friends with others. and make their name and make their name cards in groups.Ask them to design their name cards and see which group is the best.教学过程设计

任务一：结识新朋友。

1、老师首先向学生做一个自我介绍，将名字写在黑板上: My name is …, My first name is…, My last name is …同时介绍一下名字的意义，然后学生就近组成若干小组，进行自我介绍。例如：一个学生叫徐烨，他说：My name is Xu Ye.Ye means light；一个叫王超的学生介绍说: My name is Wang Chao.Chao means Superman。这个任务能够激起学生学习英语的兴趣，同时扩大词汇量。

2、“What’s your name?”传句子比赛。学生按行分组，一个同学问，“What’s your name?”第二个学生回答，“My name is …”然后再接着问第三个人, “What’s your name?” 第三个人答，“My name is … His/ her name is …”再接着问第四个人What’s your name?”。。看哪个组最先获胜。

任务二：学生利用电脑向大家展示他们所搜集的中英文姓，问候语名及各国或各地初次见面时的礼仪，体会它们的不同之处；然后由抽签决定各组同学分别用哪个国家或哪个地区的礼仪（例如：日式、美式、法式和学校版的礼仪）来表演两个人初次见面时的问候语及谈话内容（用英文），看哪一组同学表演的形象，语言准确，最后评出最佳组合。

任务三：找朋友。并将他或她加入你的朋友记录中。该任务是通过学生自己去询问他们感兴趣的同学的爱好，找出他们之间的共同点，然后和他们交朋友（利用时间争取和所有的同学交朋友，了解他们各自的优点），并将自己所掌握的新朋友的信息介绍给全体同学，让大家了解他（们）。在该任务的执行过程当中，学生可以尽量施展他们的才能，倾尽其所学的英文知识来展示自己并且看谁能获得最多的信息。因此，这项任务在调动学生学习英语兴趣的同时，也反复操练了本单元的关键句型和形容词性物主代词，尤其是he and his, she and her；同时运用到一些超出本课教学内容的语言知识，学生参与性强，最大限度的调动了他们的积极性，同时也为学生树立了英语学习的信心。

Name Hobbies Other information

任务四：制作姓名卡。制作姓名卡，由小组协作共同完成姓名卡的设计与制作，姓名卡中要求包括学生的汉语名字（拼音书写）和英文名字，其他的内容由各组自行设计，但要求每个人的姓名卡的设计要有创意、体现小组的共性、美观大方、经久耐用、语言准确。因此，该任务既体现个性，又体现共性；既有分工，又有合作。

任务五：作业。为自己、父母、亲朋好友找一个有意义的英文名字，同时将他们介绍给你的同学们。

教学点评（或反思）

本节课的设计体现了任务型教学的特点，同时整个任务链的设计均以学生的兴趣

为主，由易至难，逐层递进，逐步完成各个任务，使学生在愉快的完成每一个任务的同时，体会到学习英语的乐趣，并使每一位学生都参与到活动中，都有所提高。本节课由于是新学期的第一节课，在教学中，本着 “新学期、新起点、新观念、新

认识”的观点设计了四个快乐的任务，同时这几个任务相互连接，环环相扣，形成了一个完整的任务链。整节课课堂气氛活跃，学生学习英语的兴趣始终很浓。尤其是“找朋友”这个任务，极大地调动了学生的积极性，学生们说出了很多精彩的句子。而在制作姓名卡时，各小组通力合作，氛围和谐，作品各具特色，体现了任务型教学中共同合作与个性张扬的优势。在解释自己名字的任务中，充分调动了学生的表现欲，学生们的名言经整理后被保留下来，提高了学生学习英语的积极性。

在各国礼仪表演中学生既学到了英文知识，又了解了其他各国各地的风俗，将知识“延伸到课堂之外的学习和生活之中”。因此，这节课中的活动具有可操作性，并以学生的生活经验和兴趣出发，使学生的思维和想象力、审美情趣得到发展，从而提高学生实际语言运用能力。

另外，本节课的德育目标，使英语教学与其他学科结合起来。

当然本节课中也存在几个需要继续探索的问题：

一、师生均是初次接触任务型教学，对其仅是好奇及尝试，尚未能领会其主旨。

二、活动中课堂秩序稍有些乱，在以后课堂中应加以指导。

教师本身也需要提高对新课标和任务型教学的认识，以完善今后的教学。

英文版英语说课稿

Good morning, everyone!Today, I’ll say something about Unit 5 Section A in Book1 of GO FOR IT English.Background on the reformation of curriculum, this book can connect the life and act, emphasize the interest and experience of the Ss, the pictures are active and vivid.Grade four is the initial stage of English learning, so it stresses on the emotion of the Ss, creates a well beginning for the Ss.This Unit has 7 parts, we’ll learn sectionA mainly, it embodies the repeating characterize.Review the learned language points “Where’s„”and the new language points will be represented in the following units.So this unit forms connecting links with a special meaning in this book.The content of this period is to use “Where’sare„” to determine the place.And according to the contents and the fact of the Ss, I establish the following three teaching aims of this period: Aims on the knowledge: students can listen, read, say and spell the following words: a glass, a fridge, an egg, bread and a table.Aims on the abilities: students can listen, read, say and write the following daily expressions: What’s for breakfast?

Have some juice then.Aims on the emotion(1)To foster Ss’ consciousness of good co-operation and proper competition.(2)To lead Ss to show their loveliness to the poor.III.Key-points of this lesson(1)To help Ss ask and answer the question: What’s in it?

(2)To enable Ss to study in groups and co-operate skillfully.(3)To develop Ss’ interest in English.IV.Difficult points(1)To help the Ss ask and answer the question “What’s in it?” and make sure they can use the plural nouns correctly.(2)To finish the survey by themselves.V.Teaching methods As we all know: the main instructional aims of learning English in primary school is to cultivate pupils’ basic abilities of listening and speaking and their good sense of the English language.So in this lesson I’ll mainly use “Task-based” teaching method.That is to say, I will let the Ss learn in real situations, finish a task by making a survey to help the Ss to get a better understanding of the key structure of the dialogue.I will arrange four kinds of activities: singing, guessing game, finishing a survey and having a competition.And in this lesson a recorder, PPT, school things and a printed form will be needed.Students should prepare some school things.VI.Teaching procedures and purposes of my designing.I’ll finish this lesson in five steps.Step 1.Warm-up and preview 1.Free talk between T and Ss about things in the classroom.2.Sing the song together: Books and pencils.3.Do some TPR, for example: Show me your English me your crayon.4.Review the numbers by asking: “How many crayons do you have?”

Purpose: It is important to form a better English learning surrounding for the Ss by singing and doing some total physical response and at the same time.it provides situations to review learned knowledge for the next step.Step 2.Presentation Now I’ll mainly talk about this step.1.Present the pattern: “My schoolbag is heavy.” “What’s in it?.”(1)Show a bag and say: “Look!I have a bag.” Carry it and say: “Oh, it is heavy.My schoolbag is heavy.” Help the Ss understand the meaning with the help of my body language.Then lead the Ss to read the sentence.Make sure they can say it correctly.(2)T: My schoolbag is heavy.Open the bag and say: “What’s in it? What’s in my schoolbag?” Take out a Chinese book.Then do the action again.Let the Ss read the sentence.2.Play a guessing game.Divide the whole class into four groups to have a competition.Let them guess: What’s in the bag? How many?

Purpose: To present the key structures one by one is much easier for the Ss to learn and grasp the per competition can arouse the Ss’ interest in English learning.3.With the help of the PPT to present the dialogue.Set a situation to help Ss understand: Two Ss are coming.One girl is carrying a heavy bag on her back.They are talking.Girl: My schoolbag is heavy.Boy: What’s in it?

Girl: 20 story-books, 32 pencil, 9 rulers, 12 crayons and 30 picture-books.Etc.Boy: What will you do? Girl: They are for the poor.Boy: Great!I’ll bring some school things too.The boy comes back home and puts a lot of things into the bag.Then he goes to school again and gives them to a teacher.While he is taking them out, he is counting the numbers of all things.The teacher says: Thank you soooooooo much.4.Mention that we should take care of the poor.5.Play the tape.Let the Ss listen and imitate the dialogue.Pay attention to their pronunciation and intonation.Purpose: PPT can provide a real situation for the Ss to understand the dialogue and the relationships between people better.Tell the Ss we should show our loveliness to the Ss.Step 3.Practice Divide Ss into groups of six children.Each one would finish the printed form by asking and answering: How many storybooks do you have? Find out which group finishes faster.Purpose: Task-based teaching method is used here to develop Ss’ ability of communication and also their ability of co-operation will be well trained.Step 4.Assessment Help Ss finish “Let’s check” of this unit and workbook.Purpose: To check the knowledge Ss have learned in this period.Step 5.Add-activity 1.Let Ss tell each other how many school things they have after class.Tell their parents how many school things they have at home.2.Take care of everything they have.Purpose: Revision is so important that Ss should speak English as much as they as in class or after class.It is necessary for the Ss to do some extensive exercise after class to consolidate the knowledge they learned.In a word, the whole period is based on tasks, which are designed from easy steps to steps that are challenging.When the Ss are carting out the tasks, they can acquire information, knowledge, and have their ability and skills trained.That’s all.Thanks a lot for your attention.

新目标课件(篇8)

Class_______ Name________ Number_________

1. A. Yes, I like. B. No, I don’t like. C. Yes, I do.

2. A. I like baseball. B. It’s in my room. C. They are under the desk.

3. A. Yes, he is. B. Yes, he does. C. Yes, he likes fish.

4. A. No, I don’t like milk. B. That’s healthy. C. I like eggs very much.

5. A. Yes, I don’t. B. No, I don’t think so. C. Yes, at 6:30.

( )1. A. Yes, he does. B. No, she doesn’t. C. No, he doesn’t.

( )2.A. Chicken and hamburgers.B. Chicken and oranges.C. Chicken and bananas.

( )3.A. Yes, they do. B. No, they don’t. C. I don’t know.

( )4. A. No, he doesn’t. B. Yes, he does. C. I don’t know.

( )5. A. Tomatoes. B. Hamburgers. C. Tomatoes and hamburgers.

My name is Dan, and I _________ two brothers, Bob and Ray. We like _______ for lunch. Bob and I like ___________, but Ray __________ like. I like ________ for breakfast. I don’t like ________ for breakfast, but Bob and Ray _________. We like _________ and _________ for _________.

( )1. ________ you like ice cream?

A. Are B. Am C. Does D. Do

( )2. ________ play table tennis.

A. Let B. Lets C. Let’s D. It’s

( )3. ________ does your father have ______ lunch? Chicken and tomatoes.

A. What; for B. What; / C. How; for D. How; /

( )4. Oranges are a kind of ________.

A. vegetables B. vegetable C. fruits D. fruit

( )5. What ______ Tom like _______ for breakfast?

A. does; eat B. is; eat C. does; to eat D. is; to eat

( )6. CDo you like ice cream for ______ dessert?

A. a B. the C. / D. an

( )7. CDoes your friend like salad?

-- _________.

A. Yes, she like. B. No, she does. C. Yes, she doesn’t D. No, she doesn’t.

( )8. I have a cat. It likes fish. It eats _______ every day.

A. a lot B. many C. Lots of D. much

( )9. CDoes your English teacher sing very _____ ?

--Yes, She does.

A. good B. nice C. great D. well

( )10. CLet’s _______ baseball.

--OK. Let’s _______.

A. play; go B. plays; go C. play; to go D. play; goes

1．吃晚饭 _____________ 2、每天 ______________

3、a list of food ____________ 4、a running star ___________

1．I have hamburgers for b___________.

2. Here are some tomatoes. Do you like t _________?

3. I like French f _________.

4. I have an ice c_________.

5. Children should (应当) eat lots of v___________.

6. What do you have for d__________?

7. Zhou Jielun is a singing s________.

8. She eats h________ food every day.

9. How m________ apples do you have?

10. I’m going on a picnic with a group of f_________.

Mrs Jones: Which meal do we need most, breakfast, lunch or __1____?

Mrs Jones: Dinner is the big meal of the day. But I don’t ___2___ we need it most.

Tony: Is lunch the meal we want most?

Mrs Jones: No, ____3___ is the meal we need most. But why?

Kate: It is a long time from night to morning. We have no ____4___.

Mrs Jones: Right! If we don’t have breakfast, we don’t feel ____5____. But what makes a good breakfast?

James: I think we can ____6____ milk, bread, noodles or porridge. ___7____ are good for breakfast.

Mrs Jones: That’s right. We can eat some vegetables and fruits ___8____ the morning, too. They make us healthy.

David: I ____9___ coca cola a lot. Can I have that in the morning?

Mrs Jones: You’d better not. Water is good for you.

Danny: Mum says we can not eat too much things after ____10____.

Mrs Jones: Great, Danny. It may make you sick. After sports you need water and a rest first, not lots of food.

( ) 1. A. fruits B. food C. dinner

( ) 2. A. like B. know C. think

( ) 3. A. breakfast B. lunch C. dinner

( ) 4. A. water B. food C. vegetables

( ) 5. A. good B. great C. well

( ) 6. A. take &

新目标课件(篇9)

Unit 1 My name’s Gina Period One 课前准备教师：准备游戏时所用的图片（食物、蔬菜、动物）。学生：准备表演时所需道具（服装、假发）。教学设计 Step One :Present the sentence patterns. 1. Play a game “How many words do you know?”(利用小游戏调动学生的积极性，同时通过对冠军的介绍引出本课。) Teacher:After the study of the first three starters, I think most of the students must have known a lot of words. How many words do you know? Let’s play a game to see who know? Let’ s play a game to see who knows the most. (Divide all the students into several groups and show a pictur（图片略） to them with the computer. Every group can choose two students to join. They are asked to come to the blackboard and write down the words in 30 seconds.) (Group 2 is the champion group.They can write 11 words.) 2. Introduce the champion group to the class.（引课方式贴近生活，学生易于接受） Teacher:Congratulations, now Group 2 is the champion. But I don’t know your names. Would you like to introdrce yourselves to us? S1& S2:Yes. S1:Hello.My name is Li Lei.Nice to meet you. Ss:Hello, Li Lei. Nice to meet you ,too. Ss:Hello!What’s your name? S2:I’m Sun Ping.How do you do? Ss:How do you do ? Step Two:Drills. 1. Make introductions.（通过句型的.操练使学生更加熟练掌握所学的句式。） Teacher:The new term begins.Everyone will meet many new classmates. Do you want to make friends with them? If your answer is “yes”, please introduce yourself in your group. Example: Sa:Hello! I’m Li Lei. What’s your name? Sb:My name’s Zhang Feng.Nice to meet you. Sa:Nice to meet you,too.And what’s your name,please? Sc:Lin Li. How do you do? Sa：How do you do? 2. Listen and number the conversations. Teacher: Today I have good news for you. Three new students will come to our class.They are from other countries. Do you want to know them? Let’s listen to the recording of 1b in Section A. (Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.) Step Three:Make friends. 1. Make new friends.（用谈话的方式完成任务，生动活泼，同时更容易向学生进行美德教育。） Teacher:Now everyone has some new friends. Do you want others to know them? Do you want more friends? Let’s introduce our new friends to others,OK? Ss:OK. Example: Sa:This is my new friend. His name is Sun Nan. Sb: Hello, Sun Nan. Nice to meet you. Sc:Nice to meet you, too.Look! This is my new friend. Her name is He Lu. Ss:How do you do? Sd:How do you do? (Students can stand up and introuduce their friends to others freely.They can greet each other warmly.Everyone in the class can have more friends.They can also know something else about them.) 2. The New comers.（以表演的形式完成，使课堂气氛达到高潮。） Teacher:Just now I said three new students from other countries would come to our class.Now,look!They are here.Let’s give them a warm welcome. (Three “foreign” students come in and all the students clap warmly.) Teacher:It’s their first time to come to China.Would you like to listen to their introductions? Ss:Yes. (Three students can make introductions and act out the dialogue vividly.) Step Three: Sum up. Some students are asked to sum up this lesson. It is how to make new friends and how to greet them.It is very important in the daily life. Homework “How do you meet new visitions at home? Period Two 课前准备教师：准备歌曲磁带（歌词）、情景图片及上课所需表格。学生：需要向父母了解自已名字的含义。教学设计 Step One:Revise the sentence patterns. 1. Sing an English song.（用唱歌的方式既带动了气氛，又复习了所学内容。） Teacher:Yesterday we’ve known each other already.Do you remember your new friends’ names? If you do, let’s sing the song “What’s your name?”. Hello! Hello! What’s your name? My name’s Gina. Hello! Hello! What’s his name? His name’s Peter. Hello! Hello! What’s her name? Her name’s Anna. 2. Listen to the conversations and finish the exercises. Teacher:Yesterday I made a new friend.Her name is Jenny.She is very lovely. She introduces many friends of hers to me. Do you want to know about them? Let’s listen to the tape and find out some useful information. (Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.) 3. Act out the dialogues.（在特定的情景下表演对话更符合实际，更贴近生活。） Teacher:Now you’ve known something about introductions and greetings.But if you are in other places,how do you introduce yourself and greet others? Look at the four pictures and imagine you are in such a situation, how do you get to know new friends? (Students can choose any picture they like and act out the dialogues.) Example: (At a party) Sa:Hello! I’m Lucy Green. What’s your name? Sb:My name is Kate Brown, Jim’s classmate.Nice to meet you. Sa:Nice to meet you,too. I’m Jim’s sister.Welcome to Jim’s birthday party. Make yourself at home. Sb:Thanks, I will. Step Two:Choose English names. 1. Play a name game.（有效引出“英文名字”这一主题。） Teacher：As we know, everyone has a name.Each name has its special meaning and so do English names. Do you want to have an English name? If you do, let’s play a name game.The winners of the game will get English names. Rules: Every student should introduce himself or herself,but at the same time he (she ) should repeat all the above-mentioned classmates names. Example: S1: My name’s Tony. S2: His name’s Tony. My name’s Linda. S3: His name’s Tony. Her name’s Linda. My name’s Nick. S4: His name’s Tony. Her name’s Linda. His names Nick. My names Kim. S5:……. 2. Choose English names. 1).Find out first names and last names.（用小组的方式完成名字的识别。） Teacher:Congratulstions to the winners. Now you choose English names from the box. But before you choose names, you must know English names have two parts:first name and last name. Look at the box, can you classify them according to the demands? Jenny Gina Alan Mary Jim Tony Tom Bob Mike Green Miller Jack Smith Brown Linda Nick Kim Hand Period Three 课前准备教师：准备所需的歌曲磁带、名片样本及各项表格。学生：制作名片所需的纸张、画笔等。教学设计 Step One: Present the English numbers. 1. Sing the song “Ten Little Indian Boys”.（歌曲欢快有趣，比起单纯教授单词更为有效。） Teacher: During the first two classes, we’ve known something about new friends names. But if we want to contact them. What shall we do? S1: A telephone call. T: But you don’t have their telephone numbers. S1: Ask for their telephone numbers. T: If we want to know about their telephone numbers, we must learn how to say these numbers in English. Let’s learn to sing “Ten Little Indian Boys”. Words One little, two little, three little Indisns, Four little, five little, six little Indians, Seven little, eight little, nine little Indians, Ten little Indian boys. (After singing the song, tell the students not to forget “zero”.) T: Count the number together from zero to nine. S2: Zero… 2. Listen to the conversation and write the telephone number.（通过听力复习单词。） Teacher: This is my friend’s telephone number. But I can’t hear it clearly. Could you please help me write it down? (Students listen to the recording of 1b in Section B and give the answer.) Step Two: Drills. 1. Make a survey about your partners’ telephone numbers.（调查组内成员的电话号码，重点练习所学句式。） Teacher: Thank you for your help. But do you want to know your friends’ telephone numbers? Now let’s make a survey about it and try to fill in the chart. Name Telephone numbers Li Lei Liu Yu Lin Fang Yin Kailin S1: Hello, Liu Yu. What’s your telephone number? S2: My telephone number is … S1: Oh, thank you. What about yours, Lin Fang? S3: It’s… S1: … And may I know your phone number, Yin Kailin? S4: … S1: Thank you very much. Oh, I nearly forgot. My telephone number is… 2. Report it to the class. (After the survey, every group can choose a student to report the survey

新目标课件(篇10)

八年级英语教学设计

Unit2 I`ll help clean up the city parks

SectionA(3a-4)

一、教学目标

1、知识目标

（1）、掌握词汇及短语：spend…doing ,set up ,put…to good use ,not only…but also ,put off ,coach ,cheer up(2)、运用提供帮助的句型：You could help coach a football team

2、能力目标

（1）、运用目标语言，能比较流利地讲述自己能够做的事情。（2）、理解not only…but also 句型的用法。

3、情感目标

通过学习增强实际交际能力，培养学生为他人着想，热爱公益事业，乐于助人的优良品质。

二、教学重点

1、能够运用语言和语法知识进行阅读并理解文章意思。

2、学会如何提供帮助。

三、教学难点

理解句子Not only do I fell good about helping other people ,but I get to spend time doing what I love to do

四、教具：录音机

五、课堂教学设计

1、Duty report

2、Warm-up，学校打算开展志愿者活动，根据自己的兴趣爱好设计自己能够做的事情，激发学生的学习兴趣。

4、教学操练3b、4 让学生小组讨论解决的方法，由两三组同学表演他们的对话，使他们能流利地用英语进行交流，引导学生关心和帮助他人。

6、难点破解

（1）、掌握本课生词及重点用法。（2）、能用所学内容给他人提供帮助。

8、布置作业

假设你们班打算去敬老院慰问，根据他们的爱好，为他们安排合适的事情。

教学反思

通过本节课的学习，学生能学习到一定的阅读策略，通过复述和写作环节学生的书面表达能力会有所提高。

新目标课件(篇11)

Unit 1 How do you study for a test?

10.enjoy doing sth. 喜欢做…乐意做…

1.如何表达选择适合自己的学习方法呢？从（注意要给出原因，练习使用because）

I (don’t) think I can study English by … , because …

（1）I think I can study English by watching English movies because I like watching English movies.

我认为我可以通过英语电影来来学英语，因为我喜欢看电影。

（2）I don’t think I can get an English tutor because I want to learn by myself at home.

（3）I think surfing the internet is a bad way because you have to use a computer and always waste your time.我认为沉溺于网络是不好的，因为你不得不去使用电脑和浪费你的时间

By是个很常用的介词（有时也用作副词），在初中英语中的用法有以下几种：

Some are singing and dancing under a big tree . Some are drawing by the lake.

（2）意为“不迟于”、“到……时为止”。如：

Your son will be all right by supper time. 你的儿子在晚饭前会好的。

How many English songs had you learned by the end of last term?

到上个学期末你们已经学了多少首英语歌曲？

（3）表示方法、手段，可译作“靠”、“用”、“凭借”、“通过”、“乘坐”等。如：

The monkey was hanging from the tree by his tail and laughing.猴子用尾巴吊在树上哈哈大笑。

The boy’s father was so thankful that he taught Edison how to send messages by railway telegraph.

孩子的父亲是那么的感激，于是他教爱迪生怎样通过铁路电报来传达信息。

（4）表示“逐个”、“逐批”的意思。如：

One by one they went past the table in the dark. 他们一个一个得在黑暗中经过这张桌子。

（5）表示“根据”、“按照”的意思。如： What time is it by your watch? 你的表几点了?

（6）和take , hold等动词连用，说明接触身体的某一部分。如：

I took him by the hand. 我拉住了它的手。

（7）用于被动句中，表示行为主体，常译作“被”、“由”等。如：

English is spoken by many people. 英语被许多人所说。（即“许多人讲英语。”）

（8）组成其它短语。

1) by the way : 意为“顺便说”、“顺便问一下”，常做插入语。如：

By the way , where’s Li Ping , do you know? 顺便问一下，李平在哪儿。你知道吗？

2) by oneself : 意为“单独”、“自行”。如：I can’t leave her by herself. 我不能把她单独留下。

But by and by , more and more people began to study English.

但是不久以后，越来越多的人开始学英语了。

动词后加动名词doing，相当于名词，在句子中可以做主语、宾语、表语定语等。

1）作主语 Fighting broke out between the South and the North. 南方与北方开战了。

Would you mind turning down your radio a little, please?

Babysister’s job is washing，cooking and taking care of the children。

练习：

一. Match the questions and answers

1. Have you ever worked with flashcards?

2. Do you ever ask the teacher for help in your

English class?

3. Do you like to work in a group?

4. Does reading aloud help you?

5. Do you like to study grammar?

6. What helps you study for a test?

a. No, grammar is too boring.

b. Yes, reading aloud helps my pronunciation.

c. Yes, but I didn’t like them.

d. Yes, the teacher is helpful.

e. I think watching English-language TV helps me

study.

F. No, I don’t. Why would working in a group help?

Time spent in a bookshop can be enjoyable. If you go to a 1 shop, no assistant (营业员) will come near to you and say, “Can I help you?” You 2 buy anything you don’t want. You may try to find out 3 the book you want is . But if you fail, the assistant will lead (引导) you there and then he will go away. It seems that he is 4 selling any books at all.

There is a story which tells us about a good shop. A medical (医学的) student 5 a very useful book in the shop, 6 it was too expensive for him to buy. He couldn’t get it from the library, either. So every afternoon, he went there to read 7 at a time. One day, however (然而), he couldn’t find 8 from its usual place and was leaving when he saw an assistant signing (示意) to him. To his surprise, the assistant pointed to the book 9 , “I put it there so as not to be sold out.” Said the assistant. Then he 10 the student to go on with his reading.

1. A. good B. bad C. cheap D. expensive

2. A. shouldn’t B. needn’t C. mustn’t D. can’t

3. A. what B. which C. where D. when

4. A. surprised at B. not surprised at C. interested in D. not interested in

5. A. boughtB. found C. read D. took

6. A. but B. and C. so D. or

7. A. littleB. a little C. few D. a few

8. A. the book B. the shop C. the assistant D. the shopkeeper

9. A. in a bookshop B. in his hand C. in a corner D. in his pocket

10. A. left B. let C. helpedD. taught

Let children learn to judge (判断) their own work. When children learn to speak, other people do not correct (纠正) their mistakes all the time. If we correct too much, they will stop speaking. Let themselves understand the difference between the language they speak and the language other people around them speak. Day after day, they will make some changes to make their language like other people's language. In the same way, children can learn to do many other things without others' help. For example, to walk, run, climb, and ride a bike-make themselves understand how they should do it. Slowly they can make some changes they need.

But in school we never let a child himself find out his mistakes and correct them for himself. We usually think he never knows his mistakes if we do not tell him or he never corrects them if we do not make him do it. We should try to let him find out the answers to the problems, and the good ways of working them out with the help of other children if he wants.

Can teachers give the students answer books if they do maths problems? Let them correct their homework all by themselves. When the students tell their teachers that they can't find the ways to get the right answers, the teachers should help them. Let the students know what they must learn, how to judge their own understanding (理解力), how to know what they know or what they do not know. These are the most important.

(1).they text tells us that the children should learn things by(通过) _______.

C.making mistakes and then correcting them

D.asking other people many questions

(2).Which of the following is right? The teachers _______.

A.never give the students answers

B.don't let the students make mistakes

C.don't always correct the students' mistakes when they make mistakes

D.only give the students the answers when they do problems

(3).The writer thinks the teachers in school should _______.

A.let the students help each other

B.teach the students less good ways

rrect more of their homework

D.teach the students more book knowledge

(4).This text shows that learning to speak is _______.

Adifferent from learning other things

C.more important than learning other things

D.just like learning other things

答案及解析：

一.cefbad二．1）选A，看下文可知与价格无关，排除C、D。2）选B，不必买，可随便逛。

3) 选C，看下一句可知谈论你要的书在什么地方。4）选D，营业员只是在你需要帮助时，才和你说话，好像对售书不感兴趣。5）选B，发现一本好书。 6）选A，转折，但太贵，买不起。

7）选B，再如see much hear a little等。8）选A，找不到那本书。9）选C，看下句put it there 可知。10）选A，lave sb to do / doing / adj 让某人或某物处于某种状态。

三． (1)选C。这篇文章告诉我们孩子应通过何种方式学习事物。从第一段内容：让孩子学会判断他们自己的学习或工作。当孩子学说话时，其他人不要总是纠正他们的错误。如果纠正太多，孩子就不会再愿意说话了。从以上内容可得出应通过犯错和纠错的方式学习事物。

(2)选C。哪句话是正确的①老师从不给学生答案；②老师从不让学生犯错误；③当学生犯错误时老师不要总是纠正学生的错误；④老师只给学生答案当他们有问题的时候。前面两个较容易看出是错误的，这两种说法太绝对；从最后一段可得出第④种说法也是错误的。老师应帮助学生；让学生知道什么是必须学的，怎样判断自己的理解力，怎样去理解他们所知道或是不知道的东西，而不应是单纯地给答案。从第一段里可得出第③种说法是正确的。

(3)选A。作者认为学校的老师应当让学生互相帮助。B 教给学生较少的好方法，错误。文章提倡教给学生好的方法。C 纠正他们作业中的更多错误，这种说法也不对，第三段中“Let them correct their homework all by themselves” 作者认为：让他们完全自己纠正他们的家庭作业而不应当是老师。D 教给学生更多的书本知识，文章提倡的是教给学生好的方法，此选项错误。

(4)选D。这篇文章指出学说话就像是学其它事情一样，从第一段内容可判断出来。

新目标课件(篇12)

活动设计背景

新学期开学了，我发现有很多幼儿乱扔垃圾，于是我想针对这一现象让幼儿观察讨论，知道来到幼儿园，幼儿园是我家，应该有小主人的意识，有责任关心幼儿园的环境卫生，从自己做起，让幼儿园整洁，美丽。

活动目标

1.乐意大胆表达自己的想法。

2.激发“幼儿园是我家”的意识。

教学重点、难点

1.爱护环境从我做起。

2.激发主人翁意识。

活动准备

DVD 电视资料

活动过程

一、组织幼儿观看DVD

1.观看整洁、美丽的幼儿园

2.满地垃圾的校园

二、幼儿讨论，大胆表达自己的的想法。

三、组织幼儿捡垃圾。

四、总结，教育幼儿担负起小主人的职责，爱护幼儿园。

教学反思

在这次活动中，幼儿的学习积极性很高，能大胆地表达自己的想法，幼儿能意识到“幼儿园是我家”，爱护环境从我做起。

新目标九年级英语课件

新目标九年级英语课件(篇1)

新目标九年级英语课件(篇2)

新目标九年级英语课件(篇3)

新目标九年级英语课件(篇4)

新目标九年级英语课件(篇5)

新目标九年级英语课件(篇6)

新目标九年级英语课件(篇7)

新目标九年级英语课件(篇8)

新目标九年级英语课件(篇9)

新目标九年级英语课件(篇10)

新目标九年级英语课件(篇11)

新目标九年级英语课件模板9篇

新目标九年级英语课件 篇1

新目标九年级英语课件 篇2

新目标九年级英语课件 篇3

新目标九年级英语课件 篇4

新目标九年级英语课件 篇5

新目标九年级英语课件 篇6

新目标九年级英语课件 篇7

新目标九年级英语课件 篇8

新目标九年级英语课件 篇9

九年级英语课件实用

九年级英语课件 篇1

九年级英语课件 篇2

九年级英语课件 篇3

九年级英语课件 篇4

最新英语四年级上册课件九篇

英语四年级上册课件 篇1

英语四年级上册课件 篇2

英语四年级上册课件 篇3

英语四年级上册课件 篇4

英语四年级上册课件 篇5

英语四年级上册课件 篇6

英语四年级上册课件 篇7

英语四年级上册课件 篇8

英语四年级上册课件 篇9

九年英语课件

九年英语课件 篇1

九年英语课件 篇2

九年英语课件 篇3

九年英语课件 篇4

九年英语课件 篇5

九年英语课件 篇6

九年英语课件 篇7

九年英语课件 篇8

新目标课件12篇

新目标课件(篇1)

新目标课件(篇2)

新目标课件(篇3)

新目标课件(篇4)

新目标课件(篇5)

新目标课件(篇6)

新目标课件(篇7)

新目标课件(篇8)

新目标课件(篇9)

新目标课件(篇10)

新目标课件(篇11)

新目标课件(篇12)

新目标九年级英语课件篇1

新目标九年级英语课件篇2

新目标九年级英语课件篇3

新目标九年级英语课件篇4

新目标九年级英语课件篇5

新目标九年级英语课件篇6

新目标九年级英语课件篇7

新目标九年级英语课件篇8

新目标九年级英语课件篇9

九年级英语课件篇1

九年级英语课件篇2

九年级英语课件篇3

九年级英语课件篇4

英语四年级上册课件篇1

英语四年级上册课件篇2

英语四年级上册课件篇3

英语四年级上册课件篇4

英语四年级上册课件篇5

英语四年级上册课件篇6

英语四年级上册课件篇7

英语四年级上册课件篇8

英语四年级上册课件篇9

九年英语课件篇1

九年英语课件篇2

九年英语课件篇3

九年英语课件篇4

九年英语课件篇5

九年英语课件篇6

九年英语课件篇7

九年英语课件篇8